Yaskawa Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C general-purpose inverter Instruction manual
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C is a general-purpose inverter. The device is suitable for applications including fans, blowers, and pumps. It is available in 200V and 400V voltage classes and has maximum motor capacities from 0.4 to 300kW. You can use the Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C to control the speed and torque of electric motors.
Advertisement
Advertisement
General-Purpose Inverter
Varispeed E7
Instruction Manual and
Parameter Description
Model: CIMR-E7C
YEG -TOE-S616-56.1
1
2
Contents
Warnings........................................................................................................... i
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use ................................................... ii
EMC Compatibility .......................................................................................... iv
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .............................................................. v
Registered Trademarks .................................................................................viii
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Varispeed F7 Introduction.............................................................................1-2
Varispeed F7 Applications .............................................................................................. 1-2
Varispeed F7 Models ...................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-4
Checks............................................................................................................................ 1-4
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names......................................................................................................... 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-8
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-8
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) ................................................................... 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-10
Installation Site ............................................................................................................. 1-10
Controlling the Ambient Temperature ........................................................................... 1-10
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter.................................................................. 1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-12
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-12
Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................ 1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-13
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less......................................................................................... 1-13
Inverters of 22 kW or More ........................................................................................... 1-16
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram .....................................................................................2-3
Circuit Descriptions......................................................................................................... 2-4
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ................................................................................... 2-11 ix
x
3
4
Main Circuit Configurations .......................................................................................... 2-12
Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................................... 2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits ............................................................................................... 2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................................................. 2-20
Wire Sizes ................................................................................................................... 2-20
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-22
Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-25
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ............................................................................... 2-26
Wiring Check .............................................................................................. 2-27
Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-27
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-28
Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-28
Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-28
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-5
Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-7
Advanced Programming Mode ....................................................................................... 3-8
Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-10
Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-11
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Trial Operation Procedure ............................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Procedures .......................................................................... 4-3
Application Confirmation ................................................................................................ 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status .......................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Selecting the V/f pattern ................................................................................................. 4-7
Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance .......................................................................... 4-7
Application Settings ........................................................................................................ 4-9
No-load Operation .......................................................................................................... 4-9
Loaded Operation........................................................................................................... 4-9
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-10
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-11
5
6
User Constants ....................................................................... 5-1
User Constant Descriptions..........................................................................5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ...........................................5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode .................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ...................................................................................5-7
A: Setup Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Application Constants: b ................................................................................................. 5-9
Autotuning Constants: C............................................................................................... 5-14
Reference Constants: d ................................................................................................ 5-17
Motor Constant Constants: E........................................................................................ 5-19
Option Constants: F...................................................................................................... 5-20
Terminal Function Constants: H ................................................................................... 5-21
Protection Function Constants: L.................................................................................. 5-26
N: Special Adjustments................................................................................................. 5-32
Digital Operator Constants: o ....................................................................................... 5-33
T: Motor Autotuning ...................................................................................................... 5-35
U: Monitor Constants .................................................................................................... 5-36
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................. 5-41
Constant Settings by Function.............................................. 6-1
Carrier Frequency Selection.........................................................................6-2
Select the Carrier Frequency suit to the Application....................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-4
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source ................................................................... 6-4
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................. 6-6
Run Command .............................................................................................6-8
Selecting the Run Command Source ............................................................................. 6-8
Stopping Methods.......................................................................................6-10
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input.................................. 6-10
Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................ 6-13
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................ 6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ...........................................6-15
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ............................................................... 6-15
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) ........................................................... 6-17
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)........................................................... 6-19
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-20
Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-20
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ....................................... 6-22
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-24
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ........................................................................... 6-24 xi
xii
Limiting Minimum Frequency ....................................................................................... 6-24
Improved Operating Efficiency ................................................................... 6-25
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................ 6-25
Hunting-prevention Function ........................................................................................ 6-26
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-27
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-27
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-27
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-30
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-32
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction ................................................................................. 6-33
Continuing Operation ................................................................................. 6-34
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored ....................................................... 6-34
Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-35
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-40
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-41
Inverter Protection ...................................................................................... 6-42
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-42
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-43
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-43
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-44
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ........................................................... 6-45
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit
Terminals...................................................................................................................... 6-46
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG) .............................................................................................................. 6-46
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Error Function) .............................................................................................. 6-47
Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-48
Using the Analog Monitor Constants............................................................................ 6-48
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-50
Using MEMOBUS Communications ............................................................................. 6-50
Using PI Control ........................................................................................................... 6-63
Energy-saving .............................................................................................................. 6-70
Setting Motor Constants ............................................................................................... 6-71
Setting the V/f Pattern .................................................................................................. 6-72
Digital Operator Functions ......................................................................... 6-78
Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................... 6-78
Copying Constants ....................................................................................................... 6-80
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator............................................... 6-84
Setting a Password ...................................................................................................... 6-84
7
8
9
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection .............................................................................................................. 7-7
Operation Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-9
Errors During Autotuning .............................................................................................. 7-10
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-11
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-12
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set........................................................................... 7-12
If the Motor Does Not Operate...................................................................................... 7-13
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-14
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow .................................. 7-15
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-15
If Motor Deceleration is Slow ........................................................................................ 7-15
If the Motor Overheats .................................................................................................. 7-16
If peripheral devices like PL’s or other are influenced by the starting or running inverter............................................................................................ 7-16
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run.............................. 7-17
If There is Mechanical Oscillation ................................................................................. 7-17
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................ 7-17
If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls............................................. 7-18
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ...................................... 7-18
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................8-2
Outline of Maintenance................................................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts........................................................................................ 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline.................................................................................. 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card ........................................... 8-6
Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications...................................................................9-2
Specifications by Model .................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ........................................9-5
10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1
Inverter Application Precautions .................................................................10-2
Selection ....................................................................................................................... 10-2
Installation..................................................................................................................... 10-3
Settings......................................................................................................................... 10-3
Handling........................................................................................................................ 10-4 xiii
xiv
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor ....................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ........................................................................... 10-6
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ..................... 10-6
User Constants .......................................................................................... 10-7
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is switched on.
The VARISPEED E7’s DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the VARISPEED E7. The frequency inverter contains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter may must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
i
ii
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use!
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live from about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Safety of machinery – Electrical equiment of machines –
Part 1: General requirements
Attention: plus corrigendum September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2 1995 Safety Requirements for electrical equiment for measurement, control and laboratory use. Part 1: General requirements
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (eg upright). Maintain the specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic components or contacts.
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations (eg VBG 4). Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. For further information please refer to the User's Manual. In particular, follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), eg shielding, grounding, filter arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit braker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
6. Notes
The VARISPEED E7 frequency inverters are certified to UL, and c-UL.
iii
iv
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using YASKAWA frequency inverters design and install electrical switchgear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61000-3-2; A1, A2, A14:2000
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of YASKAWA Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
YASKAWA frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (eg drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (eg metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Recommended EMC Filters
Inverter
CIMR-E7C40P4
CIMR-E7C40P7
CIMR-E7C41P5
CIMR-E7C42P2
CIMR-E7C43P7
CIMR-E7C44PO
CIMR-E7C45P5
CIMR-E7C47P5
CIMR-E7C4011
CIMR-E7C4015
CIMR-E7C4018
CIMR-E7C4022
CIMR-E7C4030
CIMR-E7C4037
CIMR-E7C4045
CIMR-E7C4055
CIMR-E7C4075
CIMR-E7C4090
CIMR-E7C4110
Type
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5972-35-07
FS5972-60-07
FS5972-70-52
FS5972-130-35
FS5972-170-40
FS5972-250-37
Schaffner Filter
Current Weight
10 A 1,1 kg
18 A
35 A
60 A
70 A
130 A
170 A
250 A
1,3 kg
2,1 kg
4 kg
3,4 kg
4,7 kg
6 kg
11 kg
Inverter
CIMR-E7C20P4
CIMR-E7C20P7
CIMR-E7C21P5
CIMR-E7C22P2
CIMR-E7C23P7
CIMR-E7C25P5
CIMR-E7C27P5
CIMR-E7C2011
CIMR-E7C2015
CIMR-E7C2018
CIMR-E7C2022
CIMR-E7C2030
CIMR-E7C2037
CIMR-E7C2045
CIMR-E7C2055
Type
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5973-35-07
FS5973-60-07
FS5973-100-07
FS5973-130-35
FS5973-160-40
FS5973-240-37
Schaffner Filter
Current Weight
10 A
18 A
35 A
60 A
100 A
1,1 kg
1,3 kg
1,4 kg
3 kg
4,9 kg
130 A
160 A
240 A
4,3 kg
6 kg
11 kg
Dimensions
141 x 330 x 46
141 x 330 x 46
206 x 355 x 50
236 x 408 x 65
80 x 329 x 185
90 x 366 x 180
120 x 451 x 170
130 x 610 x 240
Dimensions
141 x 330 x 46
141 x 330 x 46
141 x 330 x 46
206 x 355 x 60
236 x 408 x 80
90 x 366 x 180
120 x 451 x 170
130 x 610 x 240 v
vi
Ground clip Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
Installation of Boot Type Filters E7C 4022 to 4300
Grounding
Remove any coats of varnish and paint
Metal plate
Cable length
Maximum of 40cm
Grounding
Remove any coats of varnish and paint
Motor cable
Length
Maximum of
25m vii
viii
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
•
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
•
InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
•
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
•
LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed E7 Introduction.............................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery.........................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............ 1-11
Installation Orientation and Space..............................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............. 1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover..........................................................1-14
1
-2
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Varispeed E7 Applications
The Varispeed E7 is ideal for the following applications.
•
Fan, blower, and pump applications
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to
Chapter 4 Trial Operation.
Varispeed E7 Models
The Varispeed E7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (42 models).
Voltage
Class
200 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
90
110
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
32
44
55
69
12
17
22
27
Output
Capacity kVA
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
82
110
130
160
Table 1.1 Varispeed E7 Models
Varispeed E7
Basic Model Number
CIMR-E7C20P4
CIMR-E7C20P7
CIMR-E7C21P5
CIMR-E7C22P2
CIMR-E7C23P7
CIMR-E7C25P5
CIMR-E7C27P5
CIMR-E7C2011
CIMR-E7C2015
CIMR-E7C2018
CIMR-E7C2022
CIMR-E7C2030
CIMR-E7C2037
CIMR-E7C2045
CIMR-E7C2055
CIMR-E7C2075
CIMR-E7C2090
CIMR-E7C2110
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-E7C
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
20220
20300
20370
20450
20550
20750
20900
21100
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-E7C
20P41
20P71
21P51
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20151
20181
20221
20301
20371
20451
20551
20751
–
–
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Voltage
Class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
30
37
45
55
11
15
18.5
22
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
160
185
220
300
75
90
110
132
30
34
46
57
9.5
13
18
24
Output
Capacity kVA
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
160
200
230
280
69
85
110
140
390
510
Varispeed E7
Basic Model Number
CIMR-E7C40P4
CIMR-E7C40P7
CIMR-E7C41P5
CIMR-E7C42P2
CIMR-E7C43P7
CIMR-E7C44P0
CIMR-E7C45P5
CIMR-E7C47P5
CIMR-E7C4011
CIMR-E7C4015
CIMR-E7C4018
CIMR-E7C4022
CIMR-E7C4030
CIMR-E7C4037
CIMR-E7C4045
CIMR-E7C4055
CIMR-E7C4075
CIMR-E7C4090
CIMR-E7C4110
CIMR-E7C4132
CIMR-E7C4160
CIMR-E7C4185
CIMR-E7C4220
CIMR-E7C4300
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-E7C
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-E7C
40P41
40P71
41P51
42P21
43P71
40220
40300
40370
40450
40550
40750
40900
41100
41320
41600
41850
42200
43000
40371
40451
40551
40751
40901
41101
41321
41601
44P01
45P51
47P51
40111
40151
40181
40221
40301
–
–
–
1
-
3
1
-4
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Item
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Table 1.2 Checks
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC,
0.4 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Inverter specifications
Inverter model
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
Mass
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – E7 C 2 0 P4
Inverter
Varispeed E7
No.
C
Specification
European Standard
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
Max. Motor Capacity
0 P4 0.55 kW
0 P7 0.75 kW to to
300
300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
2 0 P 4 1
No.
Max. Motor Capacity
0 P4 0.55 kW
0 P7 0.75 kW to to
300 300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA Type 1)
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.
Top protective cover (Fig. 1.4) has to be installed to conform with IEG IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements.
1
-
5
1
-6
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
Fig 1.4
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in
Fig 1.5
.
Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wallmounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Diecast case
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
Fig 1.6
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in
Fig 1.7
.
Inverter cover
Front cover
Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Digital Operator
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
Ground terminal
1
-
7
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.
1
-8
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
0.4
Open Chassis (IP00)
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1
200 V
(3-phase)
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
0.75
1.5
157
140 280 126 266 7
2.2
3.7
177
5.5
7.5
200 300 197 186 285
11
15
240 350 207 216 335
18.5
22 250 400
258
195 385
30 275 450 220 435
7.5
37 300
375 600
330
250 575
45
55
450 725 350 325 700
75
90 500 850 360 370 820
13
15
110 575 885 380 445 855
0.4
157 0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
140 280 126 266 7
177
200 300 197 186 285
39
59
65.5
78
100
100
130
140
39
59
65.5
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
5
400 V
(3-phase)
15
18.5
22
30
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
7.5
37
45 325 550 283 260 535
55
75
450 725 350 325 700 13
90
110
500 850 360 370 820
132
160 575 925 380 445 895
15
185
220
300
78
100
105
130
140
2.3
3.2
4.5
Dimensions (mm)
Approx.
Mass
3
4
W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1
140 280
6 300
7
200
310
350
11 240
380
21 250 535
157
177
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
126 280 266
197 186 300 285
207 216 350 335
24 275 615
57
380 890
63
86
258
300
330
195 400 385
220 450 435
250 600 575
455 1100 350 325 725 700
87
108
150
3
4
6
10
140 280
157
177
---
126 280 266
200 300 197 186 300 285
240 350 207 216 350 335
7
7.5
13
7
0
10
0
78
30
135
165
100
210
305
0
39
59
65.5
100
130
39
59
65.5
78
5
2.3
3.2
5
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes d*
Exter nal
Caloric
Value(W)
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
Cooling
Method
20 39 59
3
27 42 69
50 50 100
Natural
M5
4
6
7
70 59 129
112 74 186
164 84 248
219 113 332
11
24
27
62
68
94
95
M6
374 170 544
429 183 612
501 211 712
586 274 860
865 352 1217
1015 411 1426
M10
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
Fan
3
4
2019 838 997
M12
2437 997 3434
2733 1242 3975
14 39 53
17 41 58
36 48 84
Natural
M5 59 56 115
80 68 148
70 91 161
127 82 209
6
10
193 114 307
252 158 410
326 172 498
426 208 634
7.5
2.3
21 275 535 258 220 450 435
36 325
88
89
102
635
715
283 260 550 535
455 1100 350 325 725 700
505 1245 360 370 850 820
120
160 580 1325 380 445 925 895
13
15
85
165
305
395
100
105
130
400 140
3.2
4.5
24
M6 466 259 725
678 317 995
784 360 1144
901 415 1316 40
1203 495 1698
96
97
122
M10
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
2097 853 2950
130 M12 2388 1002 3390
170 2791 1147 3938
Fan
Under development
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
1
-
9
1
-10
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type
Enclosed wall-mounted
Open chassis
Ambient Operating Temperature
-10 to + 40
°
C
-10 to + 45
°
C
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
•
Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
•
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
•
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
•
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
•
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
•
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
•
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
•
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45
°
C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
120 mm min.
50 mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
Horizontal Space
120 mm min.
Vertical Space
Air
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1
-
11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7C25P5 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
-12
2
1
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-E7C45P5 Shown Above)
1
-
13
1
-14
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7C45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
A
B
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
1
-
15
1
-16
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................ 2-20
Wiring Check .............................................................2-27
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-28
2
-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in
.
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power factor improvement
Input noise filter
Inverter
DC reactor for power factor improvement
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in
.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)
Short-circuit bar
Fuse
Magnetic
Contactor
Motor
3-phase power
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
Line
Filter
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory setting)
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog frequency selection
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 1
(Default : Running)
Contact output 2
(Default : Zero speed)
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
External frequency reference
Frequency setting adjustment
2k ohm
0 to 10V
4 to 20mA
Shield terminal
Frequency setting power
+15V, 20mA
Master speed reference
-10 to +10V (20k ohm)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 ohm)
[0 to +10V (20k ohm)]
Terminating resistance
Frequency meter adjustment
Multi-function analogue output 1
(0 to +10V 2 mA)
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function analogue output 2
(0 to +10V 2 mA)
MEMOBUS communication
RS-485/422
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-E7C47P5 Shown Above)
2
-
3
2
-4
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in the diagram on the previous page.
{
These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation.
|
These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-SELV circuits, but not both.
}
Inverter supplied by four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV (or equivalent) circuits. These circuits can be accessible or interconnected with other accessible SELV circuits.
Inverter supplied by three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits cannot be accessed and must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop within deceleration time.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
5. Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode) for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V
external power supply, refer to
.
6. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
7. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
8. DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 22 to 300 kW. The DC reactor is an option for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using an optional braking resistor unit and braking unit. When using this, a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in
.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter for 22 kW or more)
2
-
5
2
-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
E7C20P4
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
Wire Type
E7C20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
E7C21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
E7C22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
E7C23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
3.5
(12)
E7C25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
5.5
(10)
5.5
(10)
E7C27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
E7C2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
E7C2015
E7C2018
E7C2022
E7C2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
M6
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
M8
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
30 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
30 to 38
(3 to 2)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
14
(6)
-
22
(4)
50
(1)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
30
(4)
22
(4)
-
22
(4)
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
E7C2055
E7C2075
E7C2090 r/l1,
∆
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
∆
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
∆
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
Terminal Symbol
E7C2037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
E7C2045 r/l1,
∆
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
E7C2110
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
∆
∆
/l2
/l2
, 1
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75
°
C
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
100 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
150 to 200
(250 to 400)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
100
(4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
60
(2/0)
–
30
(2)
1.25
(16)
80
(3/0)
–
38
(1)
1.25
(16)
50
×
2P
(1/0
×
2P)
100
(4/0)
Wire Type
–
50
(1/0)
1.25
(16)
80
×
2P
(3/0
×
2P)
80
×
2P
(3/0
×
2P)
–
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
100
(3/0)
1.25
(16)
150
×
2P
(250
×
2P)
100
×
2P
(4/0
×
2P)
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
–
60
×
2P
(2/0
×
2P)
1.25
(16)
200
×
2P, or 50
×
4P
(350
×
2P, or 1/0
×
2P)
150
×
2P, or 50
×
4P
(300
×
2P, or 1/0
×
4P)
–
150
×
2P
(300
×
2P)
1.25
(16)
2
-
7
2
-8
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
E7C40P4
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
Wire Type
E7C40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
E7C41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
E7C42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
E7C43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
E7C44P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
E7C45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
E7C47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
E7C4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2.5
E7C4015
E7C4018
E7C4022
E7C4030
E7C4037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
, 1, 2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
2.5
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
5.5(10)
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 38
(8 to 2)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2
(14)
22
(4)
38
(2)
14
(6)
22
(4)
8
(8)
14
(6)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
3.5
(12)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
5.5
(10)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
-
22
(4)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
E7C4045
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
E7C4055
E7C4075
E7C4090
E7C4110
E7C4132
E7C4160
E7C4185
E7C4220
E7C4300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
∆
200/ l2
200,
∆
400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1,
∆
200/ l2
200,
∆
400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3 r/l1,
∆
200/ l2
200,
∆
400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3 r/l1,
∆
200/ l2
200,
∆
400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3 r/l1,
∆
200/ l2
200,
∆
400/ l2
400
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75
°
C.
Terminal
Screws
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
38
(2)
38 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
-
22
(4)
50
(1)
Wire Type
-
600
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80
×
2P
(3/0
×
2P)
60
×
2P
(2/0
×
2P)
-
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
100
×
2P
(4/0
×
2P)
80
×
2P
(3/0
×
2P)
-
50
×
2P
(1/0
×
2P)
1.25
(16)
-
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
-
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
100
(4/0)
-
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50
×
2P
(1/0
×
2P)
50
×
2P
(1/0
×
2P)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Under development
2
-
9
2
-10
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm
2
)
Terminal Screws Size
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
0.5
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
0.75
M4
M3.5
1.25 to 4
1.25 to 3.5
1.25
M4
M3.5
1.25 to 4
2 to 3.5
2
M4
M5
M6
M8
2 to 4
2 to 5
2 to 6
2 to 8
3.5/5.5
8
M5
M6
M8
M6
M4
M5
M6
M8
5.5 to 4
5.5 to 5
5.5 to 6
5.5 to 8
8 to 5
8 to 6
8 to 8
14 to 6
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
100
100
150
200
325
M8
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M12
M12 x 2
M16
14 to 8
22 to 6
22 to 8
38 to 8
60 to 8
60 to 10
80 to 10
100 to 10
100 to 12
150 to 12
200 to 12
325 to 12
325 to 16
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose Terminal Symbol
Model: CIMR-E7C
200 V Class 400 V Class
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
Main circuit power input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4160
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
DC power input
1,
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
DC reactor connection
1, 2
20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
Braking Unit connection
3,
2022 to 2110 4022 to 4160
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
2
-
11
2
-12
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in
.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR-E7C20P4 to 4018
400 V Class
CIMR-E7C40P4 to 4018
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-E7C2022, 2030
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-E7C4022 to 4055
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-E7C2037 to 2110
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-E7C4075 to 4160
Power supply
Control circuits
Note 1. The CIMR-E7C4185 to 4300 Inverters are currently under development.
2. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
Power supply
Control circuits
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in
These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-E7C20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
CIMR-E7C2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
The DC reactor is built in.
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.
CIMR-E7C2037 to 2110
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
CIMR-E7C4075 to 4160
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
3-phase
400 VAC
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2
-
13
2
-14
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
Inverter Type
Voltage (V)
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
Table 2.6 Input Fuses
FUSE
Current (A)
100
130
150
180
240
300
350
450
550
600
30
40
60
80
10
10
15
20
100
125
150
150
50
60
70
80
15
20
25
30
5
5
10
10
250
300
350
400
450
600
700
900
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
I
2 t (A
2 s)
12~25
12~25
23~55
34~98
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
7100~64000
11000~64000
13000~83000
6~55
6~55
10~55
18~55
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
3000~55000
3800~55000
5400~23000
7900~64000
14000~250000
20000~250000
34000~400000
52000~920000
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
•
Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
•
For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
120% of the rated output current).
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
•
For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
•
When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to stop.
•
The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
•
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
•
If a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit are used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Braking Resistor Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals (for units from 22 kW the DC reactor is standard).
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
2
-
15
2
-16
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromangetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be caused and the overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in
Chapter 5 User Con stants.)
Cable length
Carrier frequency
Table 2.7 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
50 m max.
15 kHz max.
100 m max.
10 kHz max.
More than 100 m
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
•
Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100
Ω
and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10
Ω
.
•
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
•
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
•
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
2
-
17
2
-18
Connecting an optional Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the
.
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal over-
load relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in
.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output
CDBR Braking
Unit
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
1
Inverter
Thermal protector trip contact
Thermal overload relay trip contact
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output
CDBR Braking
Unit
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Inverter
Thermal protector trip contact
Thermal overload relay trip contact
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
IMPORTANT
When using an optional Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit, the parameter L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) has to be set to 0. Otherwise stall prevention is enabled and the Braking
Unit will not work.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Inverter
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostat contacts)
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Fig 2.8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Breaking Unit Application Precautions
When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor.
2
-
19
2
-20
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
2 k
Ω
External frequency reference
2 k
Ω
0 to +10 V
4 to 20 mA
E (G)
Shield terminal
Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference, 0 to +10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA (250
Ω
)/0 to +10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Fig 2.9
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in
.
Terminals
Table 2.8 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
Wire Type
FM, AC, AM, SC, A1,
A2, +V, –V, S1, S2, S3,
S4, S5, S6, S7
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,
M3, M4
R+, R-, S+, S-, IG
Phoenix type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire
*3
:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.75
(18)
E (G) M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2
*2
(20 to 14)
1.25
(12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to
Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes
for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
1.25 (16)
2 (14)
Table 2.9 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
AI 0.25 - 8YE
AI 0.5 - 8WH
AI 0.75 - 8GY
AI 1.5 - 8BK
AI 2.5 - 8BU d1
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.8
2.3
d2
2
2.5
2.8
3.4
4.2
L
12.5
14
14
14
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
Fig 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Solderless terminal or wire without soldering
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.11 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2
-
21
2
-22
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in
. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Type
Sequence input signals
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals
No.
Signal Name Function
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
External fault input
*1
Fault when ON.
S4
Fault reset
*
Reset when ON
S5
S6
Multi-step speed reference
1
*1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Multi-step speed reference
2
*1
S7
Jog frequency reference
*1
SC Sequence input common
Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.
Multi-step setting 2 when
ON.
Jog frequency when ON.
–
Functions are selected by setting H1-01 to
H1-05.
Signal Level
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
Analog input signals
+V
–V
A1 Frequency reference
A2
15 V power output
–15 V power output
Multi-function analog input
15 V power supply for analog references not used
0 to +10 V/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%
0 to +10 V/100%
Function is selected by setting H3-09.
–
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
–15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
0 to +10 V(20 k
Ω
)
4 to 20 mA(250
0 to +10 V(20k
Ω
Ω
)
)
AC Analog reference common
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
–
–
–
–
M1
M2
Running signal
(1NO contact)
Operating when ON.
Sequence output signals
M3
M4
Zero speed
Zero level (b2-01) or below when ON
Multi-function contact outputs
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Analog output signals
RS-
485/
422
MA
MB
Fault output signal (SPDT)
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
MC
FM
Multi-function analog output
(frequency output)
0 to +10 V/100% frequency
AC Analog common (copy) –
AM
Multi-function analog output
(current monitor)
5 V/Inverter's rated current
R+
R-
S+
S-
MEMOBUS communications input
MEMOBUS communications output
IG Signal common
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Multi-function analog monitor 2
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.
-
0 to +10 V max. ±5%
2 mA max.
Differential input, PHC isolation
Differential input, PHC isolation
-
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
.
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Flywheel diode
External power:
30 VDC max.
Coil
1 A max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig 2.12 Flywheel Diode Connection
DIP Switch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15
The DIP switch S1 and shunt connector CN 15 are described in this section.
S1
OFF
V
CN15
ON
I
Terminating resistance*
Analog input A2 switch
: Factory settings
Analog output switch**
Voltage output
Current output
S1
CN15
for S1 functions .
**Note: CN15 is not available at the standard terminal board.
An optional terminal board with CN15 Shunt Connector is available.
The standard setting is voltage output.
Fig 2.13 DIP Switch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Name
S1-1
S1-2
Table 2.11 DIP Switch S1
Function
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Input method for analog input A2
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110
Ω
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k
Ω
)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250
Ω
)
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24V common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
2
-
23
2
-24
Table 2.12 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External +24V
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in
.
Multi-function contact inputs
(Factory setting)
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog frequency selection
External frequency reference
Frequency setting adjustment
2k ohm
0 to 10V
4 to 20mA
Shield terminal
Shield terminal
Frequency setting power
+15V, 20mA
Master speed reference
-10 to +10V (20k ohm)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 ohm)
[0 to +10V (20 k ohm)]
Terminating resistance
MEMOBUS communication
RS-485/422
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.14 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 1
(Default : Running)
Contact output 2
(Default : Zero speed)
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1A max
30 VDC, 1A max
Frequency meter adjustment
Multi-function analogue output 1
(-10 to +10V 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function analogue output 2
(0 to +10V 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
2
-
25
2
-26
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
•
Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
•
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3 and M4 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
•
If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
•
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in
•
Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
•
Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath
Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at Inverter (terminal E
(G))
Insulate with tape
Fig 2.15 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
Is all wiring correct?
•
Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
Are all screws tight?
•
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2
-
27
2
-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
One Option Card can be mounted in the Inverter as shown in
.
lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.13 Option Card and their Specifications
Specifications Card Model
DeviceNet Communications
Card
Profibus-DP Communications Card
SI-N
SI-P
InterBus-S Communications
Card
SI-R
DeviceNet communications support
Profibus-DP communications support
InterBus-S communications support
Mounting Location
C
C
C
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slot C.
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Preventing C Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.
CN2
C Option Card connector
Option clip
(to prevent raising of
C Option Card)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Cards
2
-
29
2
-30
3
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-4
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
3
-2
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in
.
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Digital Operator
Key
JOG Key
Name
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Function
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
.
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3
-
3
3
-4
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the
.
Drive mode
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Verify mode
Mode
Autotuning mode
Table 3.2 Modes
Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants .
While autoruning the line-to-line resistance is measured and set automatically.
Modes
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display.
Power ON
Drive Mode
(Operation possible)
Quick
Programming Mode
Advanced
Programming Mode
Verify Mode
Autotuning
Mode
If a user constant is changed the number will be displayed.
When returning from a setting display, the rightmost digit of the monitor display will flash.
Mode Selection Displays
Lit
Monitor Displays
Flashing Not lit
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
Setting Displays
3
-
5
3
-6
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/
RESET
keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER
key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Deleted Monitor Constant
Power On
Display
Monitor Display
Drive Mode Frequency reference
Frequency reference setting/ display unit 01-03
Output frequency
Output current
Monitor setting for o1-01
Status Monitor
Frequency reference
Fan operating time
Error Trace
Current error
Operating time at error
Fault History
1st previous error
Operating time at 4th previous error
IMPORTANT
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
Modes
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants
for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
Quick Programming Mode
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
C1-01: Acceleration time 1
C1-02: Deceleration time 1
C6-02: Carrier frequency selection
AO CH1 output gain d1-01: Frequency reference 1 d1-02: Frequency reference 2 d1-03: Frequency reference 3 d1-04: Frequency reference 4 d1-17: Jog frequency reference
E1-01: Input voltage setting
E1-03: V/f pattern selection
E1-04: Max. output frequency
E1-05: Max. voltage
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E2-01: Motor rated current
AO CH2 output gain
Motor protection selection
Deceleration stall selection
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3
-
7
3
-8
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the display will return to monitor display when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants
for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Function Selection Display
Monitor Display Setting Display
Language
Advanced Programming Mode
Setup settings: A1-xx
Access level
Initialize
PI control: b5-xx
PI control mode selection
Proportional gain
PI feedback command loss detection time
Copy functions: 03-xx
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
Modes
9
10
11
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Step
No.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Digital Operator Display Description
1 Power supply turned ON.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
Increment Key pressed to change set value to
20.00 s.
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3
-
9
3
-10
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
Verify Mode
Frequency reference selection
Frequency reference selection
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 1
Input voltage setting
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
Modes
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the line-to-line resistance of the motor to achieve the best performance.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW) and rated current specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the motor line-to-line resistance measured based on these settings will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change. The user constant will be written and the display will be returned to monitor display when the DATA/
ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Autotuning Monitor Display
Setting Display
Autotuning
Motor output power
Motor output power
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Autotuning start* Autotuning
Stop command input
Autotuning completed
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
3
-
11
3
-12
4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure............................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................ 4-11
4
-2
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Select operating method.
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage.
*1
Turn ON power
Confirm status
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload?
NO
YES
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and constant settings
*1. Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
Check/record constants.
END
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
Trial Operation Procedures
Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter. The unit is designed for using with:
•
Fan, blower, pump applications
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tab
Jumper (factory-set position)
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
•
Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
•
Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
•
Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
•
Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
•
Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
4
-
3
4
-4
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for fault operation
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation Procedures
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then set the following user constants.
Refer to
Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes
for Digital Operator operating procedures and to
Chapter 5
User Constants
and
Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function
for details on the user constants.
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings
O
: Must be set.
O
: Set as required.
Class
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
O
O
O
O b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Acceleration time
1
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 0% to
100%.
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0.0 to 6000.0
1
1
0
10.0 s
5-9
6-4
6-43
6-52
5-9
6-8
6-43
6-52
5-9
6-10
5-14
6-15
O C1-02
Deceleration time
1
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to
0%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-14
6-15
O C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leakage current.
0 to D, F F 5-16
O
O d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17
E1-01
Frequency references 1 to 4 and jog frequency reference
Set the required speed references for multi-step speed operation or jogging.
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
0 to 120.00 Hz
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class) d1-01 to d1-04:
0.00 Hz d1-17:
6.00 Hz
200 V
(200 V class)
400 V
(400 V class)
5-17
6-6
5-19
6-72
4
-
5
4
-6
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings (Continued)
O
: Must be set.
O
: Set as required.
Class
Constant
Number
O
O
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
E2-01
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current.
H4-02 and H4-
05
FM and AM terminal output gain
Adjust when an instrument is connected to the FM or AM terminal.
10% to 200% of Inverter's rated current
Setting for generalpurpose motor of same capacity as Inverter
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
O L1-01
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
0 or 1 1
Page
5-20
6-30
6-71
5-24
5-26
6-30
O L3-04
Stall prevention selection during deceleration
If using the dynamic brake option (Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units), be sure to set constant L3-04 to 0 (disabled).
0 to 2 1
5-28
6-19
Trial Operation Procedures
Selecting the V/f pattern
•
Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to D) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operaton of a general-pupose motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 0
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 50 Hz
•
Perform autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or when the load causes stalling.
Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long or the cable length has changed or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
To perform autotuning set parameters T1-02 and T1-04 and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator.
The Inverter will supply power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured
Power will be supplied to the motor when autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
IMPORTANT
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.2 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
T1-02
T1-04
Motor output power
Motor rated current
Set the output power of the motor in
Kilowatts.
*1
10% to 200% of Inverter rated output
Same as
Inverter rated output
Set the rated current of the motor in
Amps.
*1
10% to 200% of Inverter rated current
Same as generalpurpose motor with same capacity as
Inverter
* 1. For a constant-output motor, set the value at the base speed.
4
-
7
4
-8
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Digital Operator Display
Motor rated : T1-02
Table 4.3 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Description
The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-04 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Autotuning started: TUn1 2
Autotuning
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.
Stop command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning, and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to
Errors during Autotuning
on page 7-10.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
Trial Operation Procedures
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
•
To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
•
To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
•
To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0% to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
•
To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not connected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the
SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applications, at which the machine only can be driven in one direction, check the motor rotation direction.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO
Loaded Operation
Connecting the Load
•
After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
•
Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
4
-
9
4
-10
Operation using the Digital Operator
•
Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
•
If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
•
At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
•
Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
•
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not to high.
•
Refer to
Adjustment Suggestions
on page 4-11 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check user constants that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
•
Recording user constants
•
Setting access levels for user constants
•
Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate memory area in the Inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the user constants can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. If A1-01 is set to 2
(factory setting) all parameters can be read or written.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will be displayed only when the correct password is input.
Adjustment Suggestions
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants
Name (Constant
Number)
Hunting-prevention gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency selection
(C6-02)
Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-02)
Torque compensation gain (C4-01)
Performance
Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower)
• Controlling hunting and vibration
Factory
Setting
1.00
Depends on capacity
Depends on capacity
1.00
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
0.50 to 2.00
0 to default
200 to 1000 ms
0.50 to 1.50
• Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at low speeds
• Controlling shock at startup
Depends on capacity and voltage
Default to
Default + 3 to 5 V
*
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.
The following user constants will also affect the control system indirectly.
Table 4.5 Constants Affecting Control and Applications Indirectly
Name (Constant Number)
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Application
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 and C2-02) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration.
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0.
4
-
11
4
-12
5
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-7
5
-2
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Constant
Number
Name b1-01
Reference selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q 180H -
• Constant Number:
• Name:
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Access Level:
• MEMOBUS Register:
• Page:
The number of the user constant.
The name of the user constant.
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
The setting range for the user constant.
The factory setting.
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the access level in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information about the constant.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor constants if autotuning data (from motor nameplate) is input for measure the line-to-line resistance.
Function
Status Monitor Constants
Fault Trace
Fault History
Initialize Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
PI Control
Energy Saving
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Torque Compensation
Carrier Frequency
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Field Weakening
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Communications Option Card
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Analog Inputs
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MEMOBUS Communications
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Hardware Protection
Hunting Prevention Function
High-slip Braking
Monitor Select
Multi-function Selections
Copy Function
Motor Autotuning
No.
b3 b5
L4
L5
L6
L8
H5
L1
L2
L3
N1
N3 o1 o2 o3
H1
H2
H3
H4 d6
E1
E2
F6
C6 d1 d2 d3 b8
C1
C2
C4
A1 b1 b2
U1
U2
U3
T
Page
5-35
5
-
3
5
-4
User Constants Setable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-4 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Constant
Number b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
Name
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
0 to 3
Select stopping method when stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are disregarded during deceleration time.)
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from
0% to 100%.
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from
100% to 0%.
0 to 3
0.0 to
6000.0
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6-03 to C6-07.
1 to F
1
1
0
10.0 s
6
*1
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
181H
182H
200H
201H
224H
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Set the frequency reference in the unit specified in o1-03 (frequency units for reference setting and monitor, default:
Hz)
Frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 and 2 are ON for a multi-function input (unit: Set in o1-
03).
0 to
120.00
d1-17
E1-01
Jog frequency reference
Input voltage setting
Frequency reference when multi-function inputs „Jog Frequency Command“, „FJOG command“, or „RJOG command“ is ON (unit: Set in o1-03).
Set the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 volt. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.
155 to
255
*2
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for setting E1-04 to E1-10).
0 to D,
F
E1-04
E1-05
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Max. voltage
(VMAX)
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
40.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*2
E1-06
E1-09
Base frequency (FA) VMIN
(E1-10)
FMIN
(E1-09)
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
E1-13
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Frequency
(Hz)
FA
(E1-06)
FMAX
(E1-04)
Change this setting only when making advanced adjustments for V/f in the fixed outputs area. Normally, there is no need to make these settings.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*2
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz
6.00
Hz
200 V
*2
F
50.0
Hz
200.0
V
*2
50.0
Hz
1.5 Hz
0.0 V
*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
280H
281H
282H
283H
292H
300H
302H
303H
304H
305H
308H
30CH
E2-01
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current in Amps.
This set value becomes the base value for motor protection, torque limit, and torque control. It is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*5
1.90 A
*4
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor items. Voltage output from the terminals, however, have a 10 V max. meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
Yes
Q
Q
30EH
41EH
5
-
5
5
-6
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 2.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes Q 421H
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this constant is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that each motor is equipped with a protection device.
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during deceleration
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a main circuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. Set deceleration time is disregarded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor Unit and Braking Unit ) is used, always set to 0.
0 or 1
0 to 2
1
1
No
No
Q
Q
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 5. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
480H
492H
User Constant Tables
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A1-00
Language selection for
Digital
Operator display
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital
LCD Operator
(JVOP-160).
0: English
1: Japanese
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
A1-01
Constant access level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-01 and
A1-04.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming (A) mode.)
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
Used to initialize the constants using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a three-wire sequence.
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 constants can no longer be changed.
(Programming mode constants can be changed.)
0 or 1
0 or 2
0 to
3330
0 to
9999
1
2
0
0
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
100H
101H
103H
104H
–
6-84
6-112
–
6-84
5
-
7
5
-8
Constant
Number
Name
A1-05
Password setting
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant usually is not displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and
A1-05 will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0 No A 105H 6-84
User Constant Tables
Application Constants: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Used to set the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to stop, no regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3 b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled b1-07
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
Used to set the operation mode by switching to the
Remote mode using the
Local/Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded. (Input
Run signals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the
Remote mode.
0 to 1
0 or 1
1
1
0
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
A
A
180H
181H
182H
183H
186H
4-5
6-4
6-43
6-52
4-5
6-8
6-43
6-52
4-5
6-10
6-33
-
5
-
9
5
-10
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b1-08
Run command selection in programming modes
Used to set an operation interlock in programming modes.
0: Cannot operate.
1: Can operate (Disabled when Digital Operator is set to select run command
(when b1-02 = 0)).
0 or 1 0 No A 187H -
DC Injection Braking: b2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency) b2-02 b2-03
DC injection braking current
DC injection braking time at start
Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-
09, E1-09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
50%
0.00 s
0.50 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
189H
18AH
18BH
18CH
6-10
6-10
6-13
6-13
6-10
User Constant Tables
Speed Search: b3
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access level
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b3-01
Speed search selection
(current detection or speed calculation)
Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
0 to 3 2 No A 191H 6-35 b3-02
Speed search operating current
(current detection)
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the speed is detected at the search current level.
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.
b3-03 b3-05
Speed search deceleration time
(current detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in 1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation)
Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the Inverter.
When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.
0 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
0.0 to
20.0
120%
2.0 s
0.2 s
No
No
No
A
A
A
192H 6-35
193H 6-35
195H 6-35
5
-
11
5
-12
PI Control: b5
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b5-01
PI control mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1 0 No b5-02
Proportional gain
(P) b5-03
Integral (I) time
Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time in 1second units.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
1.00
1.0 s
Yes
Yes b5-04
Integral (I) limit b5-06 PI limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the limit after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
b5-07 b5-08
PI offset adjustment
PI primary delay time constant
Sets the offset after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI-control outputs in 1-second units.
Usually not necessary to set.
b5-12
Selection of
PI feedback command loss detection
0: No detection of loss of PI feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PI feedback.
Operation continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PI feedback.
Coasts to stop during detection, and fault contact operates.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
0 to 2
0.0%
0 b5-13
PI feedback command loss detection level
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with the maximum output frequency at
100%.
b5-14
PI feedback command loss detection time
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level in s units.
b5-15
PI sleep function operation level
Set the PI sleep function start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
100.0
0 to
100
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
120.0
100.0%
100.0%
0%
1.0 s
0.0 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
1A6H
1A7H
1A8H
1AAH
1ABH
1ACH
1B0H
1B1H
1B2H
1B3H
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description b5-16
PI sleep operation delay time
Set the delay time until the PI sleep function starts in seconds.
b5-17
Accel/decel time for PI reference
Set the accel/decel time for PI reference in seconds.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A 1B4H 6-64
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A 1B5H 6-64
Energy Saving: b8
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
Set the motor rated capacity in
E2-11, and adjust the value by
5% at a time until output power reaches a minimum value.
b8-05
Power detection filter time constant
Set the time constant for output power detection.
0 or 1
0.0 to
655.00
*1
0 to
2000 b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
Set the limit value of the voltage control range during search operation.
Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor base voltage.
* 1. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
0 to
100
0
*2
20 ms
0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
1CCH
1CFH
1D0H
1D1H
–
–
–
–
5
-
13
5
-14
Autotuning Constants: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
0.0 to
6000.0
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
The deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-09
Emergency stop time
The deceleration time when the multi-function input “Emergency
(fast) stop” is set to ON.
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel time 2
Above set frequency: Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” has priority.
0.0 to
120.0
10.0 s
0.0 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
200H
201H
202H
203H
208H
20AH
4-5
6-15
4-5
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-14
-
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Constant
Number
Name Description
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
Run command
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
OFF
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
C2-01
Time
The S-curve characteristic time at start and end of deceleration is fixed to 0.2 sec and can not be changed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
0.20 s
No
No
A
A
20BH
20CH -
-
User Constant Tables
Torque Compensation: C4
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
Sets torque compensation gain as a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long; increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.
• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.
0.00 to
2.50
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.
0 to
10000
1.00
Yes
200 ms No
A
A
215H
216H
4-11
6-25
4-11
6-25
5
-
15
5
-16
Carrier Frequency: C6
Constant
Number
Name Description
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
1: Carrier 2.0 kHz
2: Carrier 5.0 kHz
3: Carrier 8.0 kHz
4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5. Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15.0 kHz
F: User set
*1
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1 to F
6
*1
No Q 224H
4-5
4-11
6-2
C6-03
Carrier frequency upper limit
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
2.0 to
15.0
*2 *3
15.0 kHz
*1
No A 225H -
Carrier frequency
C6-04
Carrier frequency lower limit
C6-05
Carrier frequency proportional gain
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output frequency
(Max. output frequency)
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03.
C6-03
≥
10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03
≥
5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
0.4 to
15.0
*2 *3
00 to
99
*3
15.0 kHz
*1
00
No
No
* 1. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
A 226H -
A 227H -
User Constant Tables
Reference Constants: d
Preset Reference: d1
Constant
Number d1-01
Name
Frequency reference 1
Description
Sets the frequency reference in the units used in o1-03.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.00
Hz
Yes Q 280H
4-6
6-6 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
The frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is
ON for a multi-function input.
The frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is
ON for a multi-function input.
The frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and
2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
0 to
120.00
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz d1-17
Jog frequency reference
The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is ON.
6.00
Hz
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
281H
282H
283H
292H
4-6
6-6
4-6
6-6
4-6
6-6
4-5
6-46
Reference Limits: d2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page d2-01 d2-02
Frequency reference upper limit
Frequency reference lower limit
Set the output frequency upper limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.
Sets the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
d2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
A
289H
28AH
293H
6-24
6-63
6-24
6-63
6-24
6-63
5
-
17
5
-18
Jump Frequencies: d3
Constant
Number
Name d3-01
Jump frequency 1 d3-02
Jump frequency 2 d3-03
Jump frequency 3 d3-04
Jump frequency width
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Set the center values of the jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following applies: d3-01
≥
d3-02
≥
d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, the speed changes smoothly without jumping
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency range will be the jump frequency ± d3-04.
No
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz No
0.0 to
20.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
1.0 Hz
No
No
A
A
A
A
294H
295H
296H
297H
6-22
6-22
6-22
6-22
Field Weakening: d6
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page d6-01 d6-02
Field weakening level
Set the Inverter output voltage when the field weakening command is input.
It is enabled when the field weakening command is set for a multifunction input.
Set the level as a percentage taking the voltage set in the V/f pattern as 100%.
Field frequency
Set the lower limit in Hertz of the frequency range where field control is valid.
The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and only when the speed is in agreement with the current speed reference.
0 to
100
80% No
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz No
A
A
2A0H
2A1H -
-
User Constant Tables
Motor Constant Constants: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Constant
Number
Name Description
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Sets the Inverter input voltage.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
0 to D: Select from the 14 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings
E1-04 to E1-10.)
E1-04
Max. output frequency
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
Max. voltage
Setting
Range
155 to
255
*1
0 to D,
0.0 to
1 2
F
0.0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
200 V
*1
F
50.0
Hz
No
No
No
E1-06
E1-13
Base frequency
Base voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0
V
*1
50.0
Hz
0.0 V
*3
No
No
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
E1-09
Min. output frequency
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥
E1-06 (FA) >
E1-07 (FB)
≥
E1-09 (FMIN)
E1-10
Min. output frequency voltage
E1-11
Mid. output frequency
2
E1-12
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255
*1
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
3.0 Hz
15.0 V
*1
1.3 Hz
9.0 V
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz
*2
0.0 V
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
300H
302H
303H
304H
305H
306H
307H
308H
309H
30AH
30BH
30CH
4-5
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-72
4-15
6-72
6-72
4-11
4-15
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-72
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
5
-
19
5
-20
Motor Setup: E2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
E2-01
E2-05
Motor rated current
Motor lineto-line resistance
Sets the motor rated current.
These set values will become the reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in
Ω
units.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
0.000
to
65.000
1.90 A
*1
9.842
Ω
*1
No
No
Q
A
30EH
312H
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-30
6-71
6-71
Option Constants: F
Communications Option Cards: F6
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
F6-02
Input level of external error from
Communications
Option Card
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
F6-03
Stopping method for external error from
Communications
Option Card
0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
F6-05
Current monitor unit selection
Sets the unit of current monitor
0: Ampere
1: 100%/8192
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 or 1
1
0
1
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
3A2H
3A3H
3A4H
3A6H -
-
-
-
User Constant Tables
Terminal Function Constants: H
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H1-01
Terminal S3 function selection
Multi-function contact input 1
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
Multi-function contact input 2
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
Multi-function contact input 3
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
24
14
3 (0)
*
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
Multi-function contact input 4
H1-05
Terminal S7 function selection
Multi-function contact input 5
0 to 77
0 to 77
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
4 (3)
6 (4)
*
*
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
400H
401H
402H
403H
404H -
-
-
-
-
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Setting
Value
0
1
2
Function
3
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting)
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to 0, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
Multi-step speed reference 2
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
7
8
9
4
6
Accel/decel time 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold
20 to
2F
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
34 PI soft starter
Page
6-45
6-47
6-65
6-9
6-43
6-46
6-6
-
6-46
7-2
6-65
6-6
6-6
6-19
6-44
6-44
6-84
5
-
21
5
-22
Setting
Value
Function
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
64 External speed search command 3
67 Communications test mode
68 High-slip braking (HSB)
69 Jog Frequency 2
6A Drive enable
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Constant
Number
Name
H2-01
Terminal
M1-M2 function selection
H2-02
Terminal
M3-M4 function selection
Description
Setting
Range
Multi-function contact output 1 0 to 37
Multi-function contact output 2 0 to 37
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0
1
No
No
A
A
40BH
40CH -
-
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
A
B
C
7
8
9
Setting
Value
0
Function
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
E
F
Zero-speed
Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
Page
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01
≥
output frequency
≥
-L4-01, L4-02 used)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency
≥
+L4-01 or output frequency
≤
-L4-01,
L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
-
-
-
-
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) -
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON) 6-28
6-40 Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF01 has occurred.)
Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Page
-
–
–
6-36
6-36
-
6-62
User Constant Tables
Setting
Value
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
11 Fault reset command active
Function
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
38 Drive enabled
Analog Inputs: H3
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H3-02
Gain (terminal A1)
Sets the frequency when 10 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
H3-03
Bias (terminal A1)
Sets the frequency when 0 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum frequency.
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
100.0% Yes
0.0% Yes
A
A
411H
412H
6-20
6-20
H3-08
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
0: Limit negative frequency settings for gain and bias settings to 0.
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on the control panel.
0 or 2 2 No A 417H 6-20
H3-09
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal A2.
Refer to the next table.
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for H3-09.
H3-11
Bias (terminal A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for H3-09.
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0
100.0%
0.0%
No
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
418H
419H
41AH
6-20
6-20
6-20
H3-13
Terminal
A1/A2 switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main speed frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main speed frequency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.
0 or 1 0 No A 41CH -
Page
-
-
6-28
6-41
6-30
–
5
-
23
5
-24
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
0
2
B
Function Contents (100%)
Frequency bias (Add to terminal A1) Maximum output frequency
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd step analog)
Maximum output frequency
PI feedback Maximum output frequency
E Motor temperature input
1F Analog input not used.
10 V = 100%
-
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
Monitor selection
(terminal
FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal FM.
10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Gain (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
Bias (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
1 to 38
0 to
1000.0
%
-110 to
+110%
H4-04
H4-05
Monitor selection
(terminal
AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal AM.
10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Gain (terminal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10
V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor items. The maximum output from the terminal is
10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
1 to 38
0 to
1000.0
%
2
100%
0.0%
3
No
Yes
Yes
No
50.0% Yes
A
Q
A
A
Q
41DH
41EH
41FH
420H
421H
6-48
4-6
6-48
4-6
4-6
6-48
4-6
6-48
Page
6-26
6-21
6-65
6-33
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H4-06
H4-07
Bias (terminal AM)
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1 (terminal
FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*
H4-08
Analog output 2 signal level selection
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2 (terminal
AM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*
-110.0 to
+110.0
%
0 or 2
0 or 2
0.0%
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
422H
423H
424H -
-
-
* An analog output of 4 - 20 mA can not be used with the standard terminal board. Therefore an optional terminal board (with shunt connector CN15) is needed.
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H5-01
Station address
Set the Inverter's node address.
H5-02
Communication speed selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN
MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
H5-03
Communication parity selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 20
*
0 to 4
0 to 2
H5-04
Stopping method after communication error
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
H5-05
Communication error detection selection
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1*
1F
3
0
3
1
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
425H
426H
427H
428H
429H
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-52
5
-
25
5
-26
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
H5-06
Send wait time
Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
H5-07
RTS control
ON/OFF
Select to enable or disable RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
5 to 65
0 or 1
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
5 ms
1
No
No
A
A
42AH
42BH
6-52
6-52
Protection Function Constants: L
Motor Overload: L1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this constant is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm detection level
(1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (OH3 on the Operator flashes).
0 or 1
0.1 to
5.0
0 to 3
1
1.0 min
3
No
No
No
Q
A
A
480H
481H
482H
4-6
6-30
6-30
6-32
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the operation detection level (2.34
V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time constant
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time constant for motor temperature (thermistor) inputs in seconds.
0 to 2
0.00 to
10.00
1
0.20 s
No
No
A
A
483H
484H
6-32
6-32
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
0: Disabled (main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, main circuit undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power returns during control operations. Does not detect main circuit undervoltage.)
0 to 2
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Ridethrough time, when Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-
01) is set to 1, in units of seconds.
0 to 2.0
L2-03
L2-04
Min. baseblock time
Voltage recovery time
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time, when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately
0.7 times the motor secondary circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.1 to
5.0
0.0 to
5.0
0
0.1 s
*
0.1 s
*1
0.3 s
*1
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
485H
486H
487H
488H
6-34
6-34
6-34
6-35
6-34
6-35
5
-
27
5
-28
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level (main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
150 to
210
*2
190 V
*2
No A
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
489H 6-34
Stall Prevention: L3
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during accel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when the current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. Set acceleration time is disregarded.)
0 to 2 1
L3-02
Stall prevention level during accel
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter rated current.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary. The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls.
0 to 200 120%
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set.
If deceleration time is too short, a DC-Bus overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the DC-Bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. Set deceleration time is disregarded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor Unit and Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0.
0 to 2 1
No
No
No
A
A
Q
48FH
490H
492H
6-17
6-17
4-6
6-19
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during running
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1-04.)
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls.
0 to 2
30 to
200
1
120%
No
No
A
A
493H
494H
6-27
6-27
Reference Detection: L4
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L4-01
L4-02
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when "Desired frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,"
"Frequency detection 1," or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
Effective when "Frequency
(speed) agree 1," "Desired frequency (speed) agree 1," or "Frequency (FOUT) detection 1," is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
20.0
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the frequency reference.)
1: Operation continues at the frequency, set in parameter L4-
06*.
Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over 90% in 400 ms.
L4-06
Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss
Sets the frequency reference value when the frequency reference is missing
0 or 1
0.0 to
100.0%
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0
80%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
499H
49AH
49DH
4C2H -
-
-
6-40
5
-
29
5
-30
Fault Restart: L5
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: No output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
49EH
49FH
6-41
6-41
Torque Detection: L6
Constant
Number
Name
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
0 to 8 0 No A 4A1H 6-28
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
Description
Inverter rated current is set as
100%.
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
Setting
Range
0 to 300
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
150%
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
No
A
A
4A2H
4A3H
6-28
6-28
Hardware Protection: L8
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in
°
C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat prealarm
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-
09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
L8-09
Ground protection selection
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the cooling fan OFF command is received.
L8-12
Ambient temperature
Set the ambient temperature.
50 to
130
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to
300
95
°
3
1
C*
60 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
45 to
60
45
°
C* No A
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
0 or 1 1 No A
L8-18
Soft CLA selection
0: Disabled (gain = 0)
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 No
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
A
4AEH
4AFH
4B5H
4B7H
4B8H
4BBH
4BFH
6-42
6-42
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
31
5
-32
N: Special Adjustments
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
Constant
Number
Name
N1-01
Huntingprevention function selection
N1-02
Huntingprevention gain
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
If high response has to have the priority over vibration suppression, disable the hunting-prevention function.
0 or 1
Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
If the setting is to large, the voltage will be to suppressed and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1
1.00
No
No
A
A
580H
581H
6-26
4-11
6-26
High-slip Braking: N3
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high-slip braking in percent, taking the
Maximum Frequency (E1-04) as
100%.
N3-02
High-slip braking current limit
Sets the current limit for deceleration during high-slip braking in percent, taking the motor rated current as 100%. The resulting limit must be 150% of the Inverter rated current or less.
N3-03
High-slip braking stop dwell time
Sets the dwell time for the output frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f control.
Effective only during deceleration for high-slip braking.
1 to 20
100 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
5%
150%
1.0 s
No
No
No
A
A
A
588H
589H
58AH -
-
-
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for some reason during deceleration for high-slip braking.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
30 to
1200
40 s No A 58BH -
Digital Operator Constants: o
Monitor Select: o1
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o1-01 o1-02
Monitor selection after power up o1-03
Monitor selection
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Set the number of the 3rd. monitor item to be displayed in the Drive
Mode. (U1-
)
(Only L E D operator.)
4 to 33
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: r/min units (Sets the motor poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
1 to 4
0 to
39999
6
1
0
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
500H
501H
502H
-
6-78
6-78
Set digit number excluding the decimal point.
Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set
12000 o1-05 LCD-Focus
1: light
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 to 5 3 Yes A 509H
5
-
33
5
-34
Multi-function Selections: o2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07
LOCAL/
REMOTE key enable/ disable
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and the constant settings.)
Sets the Stop Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from and external terminal, the Stop
Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
User constant initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2 kVA selection
Frequency reference setting method selection
Do not set unless using a control board from an Inverter with a different capacity.
0 to FF
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation.
0 or 1
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at
Digital Operator disconnection. Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is operated.)
Cumulative operation time setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0 or 1
0 to
65535
1
1
0
0
0
0
*
0 hr
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
507H
508H
509H
50AH
50BH
6-78
6-78
6-78
6-78
-
-
6-78
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize
Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time.
(Only Inverter output time is accumulated.)
1: US
2: Europe
Set the initial value of the fan operation time.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
0: Disable
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to ”0“
* This setting depends on the inverter capacity.
0 or 1
1 or 2
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0
2
0 hr
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
50CH
50DH
50EH
511H -
-
–
6-78
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3 0 No A 515H 6-80 o3-02
Read permission selection
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1 0 No A 516H 6-80
T: Motor Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
T1-02
Motor output power
Set the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40 kW
No A 702H 4-10
T1-04
Motor rated current
Set the rated current of the motor in Amps.
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A No A 704H 4-10
5
-
35
5
-36
U: Monitor Constants
Status Monitor Constants: U1
Constant
Number
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
Name
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Output current
Description
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.*
Monitors the output frequency.*
Monitors the output current.
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
Min.
Unit
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
0.01
Hz
A 40H
0.01
Hz
A 41H
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
10 V: Inverter rated output current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)
0.1
A
A 42H
0.1
V
A 45H U1-06
Output voltage
Monitors the output voltage reference value in the Inverter.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-07
DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC voltage in the Inverter.
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
U1-08
Output power
Monitors the output power (internal detected value)
10V: Inverter maximum capacity (max. applicable motor capacity)
(0 to +10 V possible)
1 V A 46H
U1-10
Input terminal status
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
(Cannot be output.) A 49H
U1-11
Output terminal status
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
Not used
(Always 0)
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is
ON
(Cannot be output.) A 4AH
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
U1-12
Operation status
Inverter operating status.
Run
1: Zero speed
1: everse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
-
U1-13
Cumulative operation time
Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-24
PI feedback value
Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
1 hr
U1-14
Software
No. (flash memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) -
U1-15
U1-16
Terminal
A1 input voltage
Terminal
A2 input voltage
U1-18
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Monitors the input voltage of the voltage frequency reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to
100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to + 10 V possible)
Monitors the input voltage of the multi-function analog input.
An input of 10 V corresponds to
100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to +10 V possible)
Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
10 V:Motor rated secondary current)
(0 to +10 V output)
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
U1-20
Output frequency after soft-starter
(SFS output)
Monitors the output frequency after the soft starter.
The frequency given does not include compensations.
The unit is set in o1-03.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
0.01
%
U1-28
Software
No. (CPU)
U1-31 LED Test
U1-34
OPE fault constant
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
No.)
For testing LED’s on operator. If this monitor is selected, all LED’s on operator lit (only on LED operator).
(Cannot be output.)
Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was detected.
U1-36
PI input volume
PI feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
-
-
-
0.01
%
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4BH
4CH
4DH
4EH
4FH
51H
53H
57H
5BH
-
61H
63H
5
-
37
5
-38
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
U1-37
U1-38
PI output volume
PI command
PI control output
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
PI command + PI command bias
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
U1-39
MEMO-
BUS communications error code
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
(always 0)
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Framing error
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
(Cannot be output.)
0.01
%
0.01
%
-
A
A
A
64H
65H
66H
1: Timeout
Not used
(always 0)
U1-40
Cooling fan operating time
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in 02-10.
(Cannot be output.)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
1 hr
A 68H
User Constant Tables
Fault Trace: U2
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
U2-01
Current fault
The content of the current fault.
U2-02
Previous fault
The content of the error that occurred just prior to the current fault.
U2-03
Reference frequency at fault
The reference frequency when the previous fault occurred.
U2-04
Output frequency at fault
The output frequency when the previous fault occurred.
U2-05
Output current at fault
The output current when the previous fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
U2-07
Output voltage reference at fault
The output reference voltage when the previous fault occurred.
U2-08
DC bus voltage at fault
U2-09
Output power at fault
The main current DC voltage when the previous fault occurred.
The output power when the previous fault occurred.
U2-11
Input terminal status at fault
The input terminal status when the previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-
10.
U2-12
Output terminal status at fault
The output terminal status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.
U2-13
Operation status at fault
The operating status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
(Cannot be output.)
U2-14
Cumulative operation time at fault
The operating time when the previous fault occurred.
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
Min.
Unit
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A 80H
-
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.1
A
0.1
V
1 V
0.1 kW
-
-
-
1 hr
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
81H
82H
83H
84H
86H
87H
88H
8AH
8BH
8CH
8DH
5
-
39
5
-40
Fault History: U3
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
U3-01 Last fault The error content of 1st last fault.
U3-02
Second last fault
The error content of 2nd last fault.
U3-03
Third last fault
U3-04
Fourth last fault
The error content of 3rd last fault.
The error content of 4th last fault.
U3-05
Cumulative operation time at fault
The total operating time when the
1st previous fault occurred.
U3-06
Accumulated time of second fault
The total operating time when the
2nd previous fault occurred.
U3-07
Accumulated time of third fault
The total operating time when the
3rd previous fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
U3-08
Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault
The total operating time when the
4th previous fault occurred.
Min.
Unit
Access
Level
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A 90H
-
-
-
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
U3-09
–
U3-14
Fifth last to tenth last fault
The error content of the 5th to
10th last fault
U3-15
–
U3-20
Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault
Total generating time when 5th ...
10th pevious fault occured
–
1hr
A
A
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
User Constant Tables
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant
Number
E1-03
Unit
0
E1-04 Hz 50.0
1 2 3 4
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
Factory Setting
5 6 7 8
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
9 A
50.0
60.0
B C D F
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz 2.5
E1-08
*
V 15.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 9.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
25.0
35.0
1.3
8.0
25.0
50.0
1.3
9.0
30.0
35.0
1.5
8.0
30.0
50.0
1.5
9.0
2.5
19.0
1.3
11.0
2.5
24.0
1.3
13.0
3.0
19.0
1.5
11.0
3.0
24.0
1.5
15.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
3.0
15.0
1.5
9.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant
Number
E1-03
Unit
0
E1-04 Hz 50.0
E1-05
*
1 2 3 4
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
5
Factory Setting
6 7 8
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
9 A
50.0
60.0
B C D F
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
V 200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
E1-07
*
Hz 2.5
E1-08
*
V 14.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 7.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
1.3
6.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
1.3
7.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
7.0
1.3
9.0
2.5
1.3
11.0
3.0
1.5
9.0
3.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
1.5
13.0
3.0
1.5
7.0
3.0
3.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant
Number
E1-03
Unit
0
E1-04 Hz 50.0
1 2 3 4
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
Factory Setting
5 6 7 8
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
9 A
50.0
60.0
B C D F
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz 2.5
E1-08
*
V 12.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 6.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.3
5.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
1.3
6.0
1.5
5.0
1.5
6.0
1.3
7.0
2.5
1.3
9.0
3.0
1.5
7.0
3.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
1.5
11.0
3.0
1.5
6.0
3.0
3.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5
-
41
5
-42
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04 b8-04
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Unit kW
-
-
-
A
Ω
L2-02
L2-03
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB) time s s
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
°
C
0.4
0
288.20
6
1.90
9.842
0.1
0.1
0.3
95
0.75
1
223.70
6
3.30
5.156
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
1.5
2
169.40
6
6.20
1.997
0.2
0.3
0.3
95
3
6
Factory Setting
2.2
156.80
8.50
1.601
0.3
0.4
0.3
95
3.7
4
122.90
6
14.00
0.771
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
5.5
5
94.75
6
19.60
0.399
1.0
0.6
0.3
95
7.5
6
72.69
6
26.60
0.288
1.0
0.7
0.3
95
11
7
70.44
6
39.7
0.230
1.0
0.8
0.3
95
15
8
63.13
6
53.0
0.138
2.0
0.9
0.3
95
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
o2-04 b8-04
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Unit kW
-
-
-
A
Ω
18.5
9
57.87
6
65.8
0.101
22
A
51.79
6
77.2
0.079
30
B
46.27
4
105.0
0.064
C
3
Factory Setting
37
38.16
131.0
0.039
45
D
35.78
3
160.0
0.030
55
E
31.35
3
190.0
0.022
75
F
23.10
3
260.0
0.023
90
10
23.10
3
260.0
0.023
110
11
23.10
1
260.0
0.023
L2-02
L2-03
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB) time s s
2.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
2.0
1.1
2.0
1.1
2.0
1.2
2.0
1.2
2.0
1.3
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.7
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
°
C
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
1.0
95
1.0
95
1.0
95
1.0
95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
5
-
43
5
-44
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
-
Name
Inverter Capacity
Unit Factory Setting kW 0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11 15 o2-04 b8-04
C6-02 kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection
*
-
-
20
576.40
6
21
447.40
6
22
338.80
6
23
313.60
6
24
245.80
6
25
236.44
6
26
189.50
6
27
145.38
6
28
140.88
6
29
126.26
6
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-05
(E4-05)
L2-02
L2-03
Motor rated current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB) time
A
Ω s s
1.00
38.198
0.1
0.1
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
°
C 95
1.60
22.459
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
3.10
10.100
0.2
0.3
0.3
95
4.20
6.495
0.3
0.4
0.3
95
7.00
3.333
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
7.00
3.333
0.5
0.6
0.3
95
9.80
1.595
0.8
0.6
0.3
95
13.30
1.152
0.8
0.7
0.3
95
19.9
0.922
1.0
0.8
0.3
95
26.5
0.550
2.0
0.9
0.3
95
Constant
Number
-
Name Unit Factory Setting
Inverter Capacity kW 18.5
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 o2-04 kVA selection 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 b8-04
C6-02
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection
*
-
-
115.74
6
103.58
6
92.54
4
76.32
4
71.56
4
67.20
4
46.20
3
41.22
3
36.23
3
33.18
2
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A
32.9
38.6
52.3
65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
(E4-05) tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
°
C 95
2.0
1.0
0.6
95
2.0
1.1
0.6
95
2.0
1.1
0.6
95
2.0
1.2
0.6
95
2.0
1.2
1.0
100
2.0
1.3
1.0
95
2.0
1.5
1.0
110
2.0
1.7
1.0
110
2.0
1.7
1.0
110
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
o2-04 b8-04
C6-02
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection
*
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-05
(E4-05)
L2-02
Motor rated current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Unit kW
-
-
-
A
Ω s
160
34
30.13
2
270.0
0.029
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time s 1.8
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
°
C 100
Factory Setting
185
35
30.57
4
310.0
0.025
2.0
1.9
1.0
95
200
3E
27.13
1
370.0
0.020
2.0
2.0
1.0
95
220
36
27.13
1
370.0
0.020
2.0
2.0
1.0
95
300
37
21.76
1
500.0
0.014
2.0
2.1
1.0
95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4:
10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
5
-
45
5
-46
6
Constant Settings by
Function
Carrier Frequency Selection ........................................6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-4
Run Command.............................................................6-8
Stopping Methods......................................................6-10
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-15
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-20
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-24
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-25
Machine Protection ....................................................6-27
Continuing Operation .................................................6-34
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-42
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-43
Monitor Constants......................................................6-48
Individual Functions ...................................................6-50
Digital Operator Functions ......................................... 6-78
Options ......................................................................6-86
6
-2
Carrier Frequency Selection
Select the Carrier Frequency suit to the Application
Depending on the application, the carrier frequency can be changed. Pay attention to the following explanations when changing the settings.
Related Constants
No.
Constant
No.
Name Details
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings using constants
C6-03 to C6-05.
1: Catrrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz
3: Carrier 8,0 kHz
4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15 kHz
F: User set
*1
C6-03
Carrier frequency upper limit
Set upper and lower carrier frequency limits in kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below.
In vector control method, the carrier frequency is fixed according to C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit).
Carrier frequency
Setting
Range
1 to F
2.0 to
15.0
*2 *3
Factory
Setting
6*1
15.0 kHz
*1
Changes
During
Operation?
No
No
Access
Level
Q
A
C6-04
Carrier frequency lower limit
Output frequency x
(C6-05) x K
Output frequency
C6-05
Carrier frequency proportional gain
(Maximum output frequency)
K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03
≥
10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03
≥
5.0 kHz
: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 2
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 2. The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. Can be set and referenced only when C6-02 is set to F.
0.4 to
15.0
*2 *3
15.0 kHz
*1
No
00 to 99
*3
00 No
A
A
Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
•
Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency) setting
1 to 6 (15 kHz) 1 to 4 (10 kHz) 1 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
•
The carrier frequency can be varied to match the output frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier Frequency Selection
06-03
Carrier
06-04
Output frequency x 06-05 x K*
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.1
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03
≥
10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03
≥
5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz < C6-03: K=1
•
To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
•
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) < 6 and C6-03 < C6-04, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level
When using a 200 V Class Inverter 30 to 90 kW or a 400 V Class Inverter for 30 to 185 kW with a carrier frequency higher than 10 kHz, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. Even when the overload current is below 120%, in this case an OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction level is shown below.
Overload Current Reduction Level
100%
50%
0
5 kHz
10 kHz
Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level
15 kHz
6
-
3
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level b1-01 Reference selection
Set the frequency reference source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to
Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes
.
6
-4
Fig 6.3 Frequency Setting Display
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.
2 k
Ω
2 k
Ω
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
Frequency Reference
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 (master speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 (auxiliary speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.
2 k
Ω
Master/
Auxiliary
2 k
Ω
0 to 10 V input
2 k
Ω
0 to 10 V input
Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed command 1
SC Sequence common
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.5 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, observe the following precautions.
•
Turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current (factory setting is ON).
•
The parameter H3-08 has to be set to 0.
Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current (4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the input on A2 is added to A1.
Inverter
4 to 20 mA input
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
A1 (Auxiliary speed frequency reference)
A2 (Master speed frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.6 Frequency Reference Using Current
6
-
5
6
-6
Setting Precautions
•
When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
•
The parameter H3-08 has to be set to 2 (4 - 20 mA input).
•
If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-F7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 5 steps, using 4 frequency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multifunction contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Terminal
S5
S6
S7
Constant Number
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
Set Value
4
5
6
Details
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
Multi-step speed command 2
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed commands 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the possible combinations.
Speed
TerminalS5
Multi-step
Speed Command 2
OFF
ON
OFF
TerminalS6
Multi-step
Speed Command 3
OFF
TerminalS7
Jog Frequency Selection
OFF
Selected Frequency
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency 1
2
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency
Frequency reference 3 d1-03
4
5
ON
-
ON
-
OFF
ON
*
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
Jog frequency d1-17
* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
•
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
•
When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
Frequency Reference
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Error reset
Fault Reset
Multi-step command 1
Multi-step command 2
Jog frequency
Sequence common
Fig 6.7 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
2: Auxiliary speed frequency
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 1:
Master speed frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed command 1
Multi-step speed command 2
Jog frequency selection
Jog frequency
Fig 6.8 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
6
-
7
6
-8
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description b1-02
Operation method selection
Set the run command source.
0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3 1 No Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to
Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes
.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop.
Inverter
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.9 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
Run Command
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)
Stop command (stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Run command
Stop command
Forward/reverse command
Fig 6.10 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
OFF (forward)
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Fig 6.11 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
Stop
Forward
INFO
Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run command self-holding in the Inverter.
6
-
9
6
-10
Stopping Methods
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
•
Deceleration to stop
•
Coast to stop
•
DC braking stop
•
Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level b1-03 Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are ignored during deceleration time.)
0 to 3 0 No Q b2-01 b2-02 b2-04
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
Set the frequency to start the DC injection braking in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is selected.
DC injection braking starts from E1-09 when b2-01 <
E1-09.
Set the DC injection braking current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
DC injection braking current
DC injection braking time at stop
Set the DC injection braking time at stop.
Use when stopping if rotations continue due to momentum.
Set to 0.00 to disable DC injection braking time at stop.
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
0.5 Hz
50%
0.50 s
No
No
No
A
A
A
Stopping Methods
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to
page 6-16 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
.
Run command
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop.
Run command
Output frequency
ON OFF
Inverter output frequency interrupted
Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop
INFO
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has elapsed.
6
-
11
6
-12
DC Braking Stop
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) is elapsed, DC injection will be applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF
DC injection brake time b2-04 x 10
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time b2-04
10%
Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (maximum output frequency
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and the deceleration time.
Run command
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Minimum output frequency
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Stopping Methods
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection at start will stop the motor before starting, if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description b2-02 DC injection braking current
Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to
100
50% No A
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s No A
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-
) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set, when the Inverter is being stopped.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09 b2-01
DC injection brake
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will resume.
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6
-
13
6
-14
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-
) to 28 to 2B (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-
) to 28 or 2A, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-
) to 29 or 2B.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Constant
Number
Name
C1-09 Emergency stop time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is ON.
This time will be used when a fault is detected, for which emergency stop was programmed.
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s No A
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to
0% of (E1-04). The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
Name
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
C1-11
Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency
C2-01
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
Acceleration time when multi-function input "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is ON.
Deceleration time when multi-function input "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is ON.
Set the frequency at which acceleration/deceleration time switches automatically.
Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration time 2
Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration time 1
Multi-function inputs "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" and "Acceleration/deceleration time selection
2" are given priority.
Set the S-curve characteristic time for each part in seconds.
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, the start time and end time S-curve characteristic time's acceleration time is lengthened by 1/2 only.
Run command
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
OFF
0.0 to
6000.0
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
C2-01
0.0 to
120.0
10.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.20 s
0.20 s
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Time
The S-curve characteristic time at start and end of deceleration is fixed to 0.2 sec. and can not be changed.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using VARISPEED E7, you can set two acceleration times and two deceleration times. When the multi-function input terminals (H1-
) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal
OFF
ON
Acceleration Time
C1-01
C1-03
Deceleration Time
C1-02
C1-04
6
-
15
6
-16
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the output frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/ deceleration time switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency
≥
C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 2 (C1-03, C1-04).
Fig 6.17 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting the machine.
By using the VARISPEED E7 inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: At acceleration start, and at acceleration end.
For deceleration start and deceleration end the S-curve characteristic times are fixed to 0.2 sec. They can not be switched off or changed.
INFO
When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
Output frequency
Fig 6.18 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-
02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
L3-01
L3-02
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting. Motor may stall if the load is too high.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set in L3-
02 is exceeded. Acceleration continues when current value is reduced.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration using the level set in L3-02 as the standard. The acceleration time setting is ignored.)
Stall prevention level during acceleration
0 to 2
Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be
100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting. Lower the set value if the motor stalls using the factory setting.
0 to 200
1
120%
No
No
A
A
6
-
17
6
-18
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.19 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
•
If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the factory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
•
If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
•
Set the constants as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during
Acceleration)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Fig 6.20 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid overvoltage tripping.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during deceleration function selection
0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to setting. When the deceleration time is short, there is a risk of DC bus overvoltage (0V) occurring.)
1: Enabled (Prevents deceleration when DC bus voltage reaches the overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts after voltage has been restored.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Minimizes deceleration judging from
DC bus voltage. The deceleration time setting is ignored.)
If using the dynamic brake option (Braking Resistor Units and
Braking Units), be sure to set constant L3-04 to 0.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Acess
Level
0 to 2 1 No A
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.21 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
•
The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and the input voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
200 V class
400 V class
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage
E1-01
≥
400 V
E1-01 < 400 V
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
760
660
•
When using the braking option (Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units), be sure to set constant L3-04 to 0.
6
-
19
6
-20
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
H3-02
H3-03
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
Name
Frequency reference (voltage) terminal A1 input gain
Frequency reference (voltage) terminal A1 input bias
Description
Set the frequency during 10 V input as a percentage, taking max. output frequency to be 100%.
Set the frequency during 0 V input as a percentage, taking max. output frequency to be 100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
100.0%
0.0%
Yes
Yes
A
A
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
0: 0 to +10V input.
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on the control panel.
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal
A2.
Multi-function analog input (current) terminal A2 input gain
Set the reference capacity for each function during 10 V
(20 mA) input as a percentage.
Set the 100% content function selected using H3-09 to
100%.
Multi-function analog input (current) terminal A2 input bias
Set the reference capacity for each function during 0 V (4 mA) input as a percentage.
Set the 100% content function selected using H3-09 to
100%.
0 or 2
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
2
0
100.0%
0.0%
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and
H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Frequency reference Frequency reference
Terminal A1 input voltage
Terminal A1 input
Fig 6.22 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A2 input voltage (current)
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.23 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference terminal A1 input voltage
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.24 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
6
-
21
6
-22
Frequency reference
Terminal A1 input voltage
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
•
This function allows the prohibition or „jumping“ of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output frequency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
•
It is also used for deadband control.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0.0 Hz No A
Set the frequency center value at which to prohibit settings.
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency.
Make sure the settings are as follows: d3-01
≥
d3-02
≥
d3-
03.
Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited.
Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made gradually without performing jumps.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
No
No
A
A d3-04 Jump frequency width
Set the jump frequency width in hertz.
The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump frequency
±d3-04).
0.0 to
20.0
1.0 Hz No
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
A
Adjusting Frequency References
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Frequency reference ascending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency reference
Jump frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.25 Jump Frequency
Setting Precautions
•
Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01
≥
d3-02
≥
d3-03 > Analog input.
•
When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6
-
23
6
-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output
Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
Set the output frequency upper limit, taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
•
Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
•
Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multistep speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Constant
Number d2-02 d2-03
Name Description
Frequency reference lower limit
Set the output frequency lower limit, taking the base reference to be 100%.
Master speed reference lower limit
Set the master speed reference lower limit, taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
Improved Operating Efficiency
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
The Torque Compensation function calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss
×
constant C4-01.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
C4-01 Torque compensation gain
Set the torque compensation gain using the multiplication factor. Normally, there is no need to set this constant.
Adjust the torque compensation gain in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during lowspeed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
Set the primary delay for the torque compensation function in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust this constant in the following circumstances.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Setting
Range
0.00 to
2.50
0 to
10000
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
1.00
200 ms
Yes
No
A
A
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment.
Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances.
•
If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
•
If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
•
If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
•
If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
•
If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
6
-
25
6
-26
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-02
Name
Hunting-prevention gain
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
If high response is to be given priority over vibration suppression, disable the hunting-prevention function.
Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too suppressed and the motor may stall.
0 or 1
0.00 to
2.50
1
1.00
No
No
A
A
Machine Protection
Machine Protection
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L3-05
L3-06
Stall prevention selection during running function selection
0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting. Motor may stall when the load is large.)
1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Stall prevention function during operation deceleration time is set in C1-
02.)
2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Stall prevention function during operation deceleration time is set in C1-
04.)
Stall prevention level during running
Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a percentage, taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory setting.
Setting
Range
0 to 2
30 to 200
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
1
120%
No
No
A
A
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque), you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2 or M3-M4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 and H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%).
6
-
27
6
-28
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L6-01
Torque detection selection
1
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 8 0 No A
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
150% No A
L6-03 Torque detection time 1 Set the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
0 to 300
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s No A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 and H2-02)
Set
Value
B
17
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
L6-01 Set Values and LED Indicators
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
0
Function
LED Indicator
Overtorque/Undertorque
Detection 1
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL3 lit
OL3 lit
UL3 flashes
UL3 flashes
UL3 lit
UL3 lit
Machine Protection
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
•
Overtorque Detection
Motor current
L6-02
Overtorque detection 1 NO
L6-03
L6-03
*Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.
•
Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02
Overtorque detection 1 NO
L6-03
L6-03
*Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.
6
-
29
6
-30
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
E2-01 Motor rated current
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control
Methods
Set the motor rated current.
This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No Q
L1-01 Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
With applications where the power supply is often turned
ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 1, as the thermal value will be reset. If multiple motors are connected to one
Inverter, set this constant to 0, and install a thermal relay in each motor.
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
The factory setting is resistance at 150% for 1 min.
If the motor overload resistance is clear, set the overload resistance protection time during hot start to suit the motor.
0 or 1
0.1 to
5.0
1
1.0 min
No
No
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The shown values are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
Q
A
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 and H2-02)
Set
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1).
Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Enable or disable the overload protection function for a general purpose motor.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
1
General-purpose motor (standard motor)
Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Short time 60s
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW
18.5 kW min.
80% ED or Frame number Max.
30 min. speed of 200 LJ min.
50% ED or 30 min.
Continuous
Frame number
Max
.
speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 160 MJ to
180 LJ
Frame number
Max. speed of
132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
Use this motor for operations using a commercial power supply. This motor construction yields best cooling effect when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continuously at 50/60 Hz or less, motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The
Inverter outputs the error contact, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Machine Protection
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.26 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
•
If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor, install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
•
With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
•
For save overload tripping, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
•
When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f
1/4
(frequency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to 1) and you set H2-01 or H2-02 (multifunction output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6
-
31
6
-32
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (OH3 on the Digital Operator flashes).
Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the operation detection level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3
0 to 2
3
1
No
No
A
A
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time constant
Set H3-09 to E, and set the primary delay time constant for motor temperature (thermistor) inputs in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s No A
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Class F Class H
Resistance (Ohms)
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Temperatue
Fig 6.27 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Machine Protection
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
OH3
OH4
Details
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram.
Inverter
Multi-function contact input
Branch resistance
18 k
Ω
*1
PTC thermistor
Multi-function contact output
Fault contact output
Multi-function contact output
*1
The resistance value of 18 k
Ω
is only valid for using a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic shown on the previous page.
Fig 6.28 Mutual Connections for Motor Overheating Protection
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF (A2 voltage input). The factory setting is ON (A2 current input).
• The parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V input).
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 or 1 0 No A
6
-
33
6
-34
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a momentary power loss.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the power loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is recovered while the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will not be detected.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection
0: Disabled (main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, main circuit undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power returns during control operations. Does not detect main circuit undervoltage.)
0 to 2
L2-02
L2-03
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss selection
(L2-01) is set to 1.
Min. baseblock (BB) time
0 to 2.0
Set the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time; when the
Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times of the motor secondary circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
L2-04
L2-05
Voltage recovery time
Undervoltage (UV) detection level
Set the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Set the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
0.0 to
5.0
150 to
210
*2
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
0
0.1 s
*1
0.1 s
0.3 s
190 V
*2
*1
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Precautions
•
Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
•
To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
•
If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Continuing Operation
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control, and then starts smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to enabled.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05
L2-03
Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation)
Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection
The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency, and the speed is detected when the set search current level is reached.
Speed search operating current (current detection)
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.
Speed search deceleration time (current detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search.
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
Speed search wait time
(current detection or speed calculation)
Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the Inverter. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.
Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
0 to 4
0 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
0.0 to
20.0
2
120%
2.0 s
0.2 s
No A
No
No
No
A
A
A
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time, when the inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor secondary circuit time constant.
If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s
No A
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0 0.3 s
* 1
No A
* 1 . Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6
-
35
6
-36
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Set
Value
61
62
Function
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed)
Current detection (Start speed search from maximum output frequency)
External search command 2
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed) (Same operation as external search command 1)
Current detection: Start speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was input).
Access
Level
Yes
Yes
Setting Precautions
•
When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error will occur. Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2.
•
If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the run command and external search command are both ON. This two commands must be kept on, at least for the time set in parameter L2-03.
•
If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time by setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
•
Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.
•
If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after power recovery, lengthen the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
•
Always perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
•
If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, perform autotuning again.
Continuing Operation
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at start , and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to 1 or 3.
Search Name
Search Method
Table 6.1 Search Methods
Estimated Speed Current Detection
Estimates the motor speed when the search starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the estimated speed to the set frequency. You can also search including direction of motor rotation.
Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected, or from the highest frequency, and performs speed detection by watching the current level during the search.
External Speed Search
Command
External search command 1 and external search command 2 become the same operation, estimating the motor speed and starting the search from the estimated speed.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Application Precautions
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two or more frames smaller than the Inverter capacity.
The motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads.
Estimated Speed Search
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown below.
Run command
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference
Set using speed detected
Output frequency b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s *Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.29 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
6
-
37
6
-38
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
•
Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
10 ms
*1. Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before the baseblock.
*2. After AC power supply recorvery, motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.30 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
•
Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long, operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.31 Speed Search after Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Current Detection Speed Search
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
Continuing Operation
Run command
OFF
ON
Maximum output frequency or set frequency
Output frequency
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set fequency reference b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.32 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
•
Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set fequency reference b3-02 speed search operating current
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Fig 6.33 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
•
Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
ON OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set fequency reference
Output frequency b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
Fig 6.34 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
6
-
39
6
-40
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation at reduced speed using the set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops over 90 % in 400 ms or less.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L4-05
L4-06
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
Operation when frequency reference is missing
0: Stop
1: Operation (L4-06*fref@loss) inverter runs with reduced speed.
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped over 90% in 400 ms.
Output frequency adjustment after freq. reference loss
If L4-05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost, inverter will run at: fout = L4-06*fref before lossing.
0 or 1
0 – 100%
0
80%
No
No
A
A
Continuing Operation
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not work.
• OC (Overcurrent) • LF (Output phase failure)
• GF (Ground fault)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)
*
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L5-01
L5-02
Number of auto restart attempts
Set the number of auto restarts attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency.
Auto restart operation selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 10 0 No A
0 or 1 0 No A
Application Precautions
•
The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an error reset has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
6
-
41
6
-42
Inverter Protection
Reducing Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fin using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from overheating.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fin overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat pre-alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in
°
C.
The pre-alarm is detected when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat prealarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
50 to 130
0 to 3
95
3
°
C No
No
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an input from H1-01 to H1-
05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description b1-01 Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card b1-02 Operation method selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3 1
0 to 3 1
No
No
Q
Q
INFO
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
6
-
43
6
-44
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from the frequency reference value before the baseblock command was input.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
8
9
Function
External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON)
External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF)
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Frequency reference
Input
Cleared
Search from stored frequency reference
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.35 Baseblock Commands
IMPORTANT
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Always use base block command when a contactor between inverter and motor is installed.
Input Terminal Functions
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.36 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Application Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
•
When performing sample/hold of analog frequency reference, be sure to store reference for 100 ms minimum. If the sample/hold time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
•
The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
6
-
45
6
-46
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch frequency reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals. Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the Inverter is stopped.
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the following constants.
•
Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
•
Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal [sequence inputs])
•
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status
OFF
ON
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
Inverter
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name d1-17 Jog frequency reference
Description
The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is ON.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to
120.00
6.00 Hz Yes Q
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
12
13
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Function
Input Terminal Functions
Application Precautions
•
Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
•
When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the
Inverter (External Error Function)
The external error function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external error signal. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
•
Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
External error detection method
•
Operation during external error detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Set
Value
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NC Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During
Operation
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Operation During Error Detection
Coast to
Stop
(Error)
Emergency
Stop
(Error)
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
28
29
2A
2B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2C
2D
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2E
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note1.Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6
-
47
6
-48
Monitor Constants
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) at terminal FM.
10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Setting
Range
1 to 38
H4-02
H4-03
H4-06
Gain (terminal FM)
Bias (terminal FM)
Bias (terminal AM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (FM) voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0 ~
1000.0%
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal AM.
10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM)
1 to 38
Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output
2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the
100% output for the monitor items. The maimum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0 ~
1000.0%
Set the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
2
100%
0.0%
3
50%
0.0%
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection (FM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1
(terminal FM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 or 1
0, 1, 2
0 No A
H4-08
Analog output signal 2 level selection (AM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2
(terminal FM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 or 1
0, 1, 2
0 No A
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1-
[status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants
, and set the values for the
part of U1-
(status monitor).
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.
Monitor Constants
Adjusting the Meter
The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown in Fig. 6.51.
10 V/100% monitor output
× output gain + output bias
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Fig 6.37 Monitor Output Adjustment
Monitor item
6
-
49
6
-50
Individual Functions
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the
MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond.
The master performs serial communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of each slave before, so that the master can perform serial communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
PLC
Inverter Inverter Inverter
Fig 6.38 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
Communications Cycle
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
Parity:
Stop bits:
MEMOBUS
31 units max.
8 bits fixed
Select from even, odd, or none.
1 bit selected
Individual Functions
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
RS-422A or RS-485
O
F
F
S1
1
2
Switch
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.39 Communications Connection Terminal
Terminating resistance
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, and use proper shield clamps
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior. See picture.
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
6
-
51
6
-52
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level b1-01 Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q b1-02 Operation method selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q
H5-01 Station address Set the Inverter station address [hex].
0 to 20
*
1F No A
H5-02 Baud rate selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
H5-03 Communications parity selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
H5-04
Communication error detection selection
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to a stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-02
3: Continue operation
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
3
0
3
No
No
No
A
A
A
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Communications error detection selection
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect
1: Detect
Send wait time
RTS control ON/OFF
Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
Select to enable or disable RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 or 1
5 to 65 ms
0 or 1
1
5 ms
1
No
No
No
A
A
A
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.
•
Monitoring operation status of the inverter
•
Setting and reading constants
•
Resetting errors
•
Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.
IMPORTANT
Individual Functions
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following:
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 setting
24 bits long
Fig 6.40 Message Spacing
5 ms min.
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
03H
08H
10H
Function
Read storage register contents
Loopback test
Write multiple storage registers
Command Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
8 8
8
11
8
41
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
7 37
8
8
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
6
-
53
6
-54
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method:
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities. The addresses must be consecutive, starting from a specified address. The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
04H
45H
F0H
02H
03H
00H
20H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
03H
Data quantity
Higher
1st storage register
Lower
Higher
Next storage register
Lower
Higher
Next storage register
Lower
Higher
Next storage register
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
08H
00H
65H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
83H
Error code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
03H
F1H
31H
Individual Functions
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address
Function code
01H
08H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
Function code
01H
89H
Error Code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
01H
86H
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses. The written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message: Higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
No. of data
Lead data
Next data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
10H
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
90H
02H
CDH
C1H
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle response messages in the same way.
IMPORTANT
6
-
55
6
-56
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
0001H
Contents
Reserved
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Error reset
ComNet
1: Run 0: Stop
Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
External error 1: Error (EFO)
1: Reset command
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
ComCtrl
Multi-function input command 3
Multi-function input command 4
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Bit A
Multi-function input command 6
Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03) 0002H
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H
0007H
0008H
Not used
Analog output 1 setting (0 V/0 to 11 V/726)
→
10V = 660
Analog output 2 setting (0 V/0 to 11 V/726)
→
10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Contact output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F Not used
1: ON 0: OFF
000AH to 000EH Not used
Individual Functions
Register No.
Contents
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Not used
Bits 3 to B Not used
000FH
C
D
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
F
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error 1: Error
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Bits 8 to F Not used
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Not used
Fuse blown (PUF)
PI feedback reference lost (FbL)
External error (EF, EFO)
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Not used
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Missing output phase (LF)
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
6
-
57
6
-58
Register No.
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
002BH
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1
Bit 2
Not used
Not used
Bit 3
Bit 4
Upper and lower limit errors
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
Frequency reference
Monitors U1-01
Output frequency
Monitors U1-02
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
Contents
Output current U1-03
Output power U1-08
Not used
Not used
Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Multi-function contact input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Multi-function contact input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F Not used
Individual Functions
Register No.
002CH
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Operation
Zero speed
Frequency matching
User-defined speed matching
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2
Inverter startup completed
Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Baseblock
Frequency reference mode
Run command mode
1: Operating
1: Zero speed
1: Matched
1: Matched
1: Output frequency
≤
L4-01
Output frequency
≥
L4-01
1: Startup completed
1: Inverter output baseblock
1: Not communication 0: Communication
1: Not communication 0: Communication
Overtorque detection
Frequency reference lost
1: Detected
1: Lost
Retrying error 1: Retrying
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF 002DH
Bit 2 Not used
Bits 3 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H PI feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H
003AH
PI input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
PI output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH
003CH
CPU software number
Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
003DH
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Invalid data length
Not used
Parity error
Overrun error
Bit 5
Bit 6
Framing error
Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used
KVA setting 003EH
003FH Not used
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
6
-
59
6
-60
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External error 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Bit 5 Error reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Not used.
0002H
Frequency reference
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area, use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No.
0900H
0910H
Contents
Write constant data to EEPROM
Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100,000. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Individual Functions
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
01H
02H
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Contents
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants to the inverter during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
•
When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
•
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
•
When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
•
When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
INFO
6
-
61
6
-62
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.41 Details of Communications Terminals
During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Individual Functions
Using PI Control
PI control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P) and integral control (I), you can even control targets (machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below.
P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback value to the target value.
PI Control Operation
To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I, the variation in the amount of operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
Amount of operation
PI control
I control
P control
Time
Fig 6.42 PI Control Operation
PI Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Control Details
Speed Control
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Pressure
Control
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Temperature Control
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control by rotating the fan.
Example of
Sensor Used
Tachometer generator
Pressure sensor
Flow rate sensor
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
6
-
63
6
-64
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level b5-01 PI control mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 No A b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-06 b5-07
Proportional gain (P)
Integral (I) time
Integral (I) limit
PI limit
PI offset adjustment
Sets P-control proportional.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the limit after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the offset after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum outut frequency.
b5-08 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17
PI primary delay time constant
Selection of PI feedback command loss detection
PI feedback command loss detection level
PI feedback command loss detection time
PI sleep function operation level
PI sleep operation delay time
Accel/decel time for PI reference
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI-control outputs.
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0: No detection of loss of PI feedback
1: Detection of loss of PI feedback. Operation continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PI feedback. Coasts to stop during detection, and fault contact oprates.
Set the PI feedback loss detection level as a percent, with the maximum output frequency at 100%.
0 to 2
0 to 100
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level in s units.
0.0 to
25.5
Set the PI sleep function start level as a frequency.
Set the delay time until the PI sleep function starts.
Set the accel/decel time for PI reference.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
25.5
H6-01
Pulse train input function selection
0: Frequency reference
1: PI feedback value
2: PI target value
0 to 2
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
1.00
1.0 s
100.0%
100.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
0
0%
1.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
U1-24
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
PI feedback value
PI input volume
PI output volume
PI command
Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to
100%.
PI feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/100%
PI control output
Given as maximum frequency/100%
PI command + PI command bias
Given as maximum frequency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Min.
Unit
0.01
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Access
Level
A
A
A
A
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)
Function
Individual Functions
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
B PI feedback
Function
Max. output frequency
PI Control Methods
The PI control method can be enabled or disabled by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
0
1
Control Method
PI disabled
PI output becomes the Inverter output frequency.
PI Feedback Input Methods
The multifunction analog input A2 can be used for PI control feedback input.
Therefore the parameter H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) has to be set to B (PIfeedback).
The PI feedback value can be adjusted by using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
PI Adjustment Examples
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6
-
65
6
-66
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occures, reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PI primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
•
In PI control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
•
The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PI control calculation from exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
•
The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PI control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
Individual Functions
•
Set the low pass filter time constant for the PI control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent machinery resonance when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
•
With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can increase or decrease the PI target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/ deceleration function (constant C1) that is normally used, however, is allocated after PI control, so depending on the settings, resonance with PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-
17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multifunction input set value 34 (PI soft starter).
6
-
67
PI Control Block
The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter.
6
-68
Fig 6.43 PI Control Block
Individual Functions
PI Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PI control, be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function. If PI feedback is lost, the
Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PI feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PI feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PI feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PI feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PI feedback value
Loss detection level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
No Fbl detection
Fbl detection
Loss detection time’
(b5-14)
Time
Fig 6.44 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PI Sleep
The PI sleep function stops the Inverter when the PI target value falls below the sleep operation level (b5-15) for the sleep operation time set in parameter b5-16 or longer. The inverter operation will resume, if the PI target value exceeds the sleep operation level for the time set in parameter b5-16 or longer.
When PI control is disabled, the PI sleep function is also disabled. When using the PI sleep function, select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PI sleep time chart is shown below.
PI target value
Sleep operation level b5-15
Sleep operation delay time
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation Stopped
Sleep operation delay time
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.45 PI Sleep Time Chart
6
-
69
6
-70
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1.
Related Constants
Constant
Number b8-04
Name
Energy-saving coefficient
Details b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity in E2-11, and adjust the value by
5% at a time until output power reaches a minimum value.
b8-05 b8-06
Power detection filter time constant
Set the time constant for output power detection.
Search operation voltage limiter
Set the limit value of the voltage control range during search operation.
Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute variations in voltage using energy-saving control. Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor base voltage.
* 1. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Setting
Range
0 or 1
0.0 to
655.00
*1
0 to 2000
0 to 100
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
Access
Level
0
*2
20 ms
0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
By the Energy Saving function the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference.
•
b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output). Also, adjust b8-04 in steps of 5 until reaches it’s minimum. The larger the energy-saving coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
•
To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
•
Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Consequently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation is used by varieting voltage. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for
400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Individual Functions
Setting Motor Constants
Normally the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
E2-01 Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current.
These set values will become the reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
*1
Ω
Note The factory-set constants are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
* 1. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
No
Q
A
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods
The motor constants settings methods are given below. To enter settings refer to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
•
E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω
) at 75
°
C of test report]
×
0.92 (
Ω
)
•
•
B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω
) at 75
°
C of test repor]t
×
0.92 (
Ω
)
F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω
) at 115
°
C of test report]
×
0.87 (
Ω
)
6
-
71
6
-72
Setting the V/f Pattern
Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as the need arises.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Mid. output frequency voltage
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Name
Input voltage setting
V/f pattern selection
Max. voltage (VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Mid. output frequency
Mid. output frequency 2
Base voltage
Description
Set the Inverter input voltage. This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No Q
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset V/f patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Application for settings
E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F F No Q
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
120.0
50.0 Hz
200.0 V
*1
50.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
15.0 V
*1
1.3 Hz
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for
E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥
E1-06 (FA)
>
E1-07 (FB)
≥
E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
9.0 V
*1
No A
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 Hz
*2
0.0 V
*2
0.0 V
*2
No
No
No
A
A
A
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Individual Functions
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the standard value for the protection function and similar functions (overvoltage level, stall trip).
Setting V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern in E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select one of the 14 pattern types (set value: 0 to D) that have been set beforehand, or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is set to 0.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic Application
Set
Value
Specifications
0 (F) 50 Hz specifications
1 60 Hz specifications
Constant Torque
Characteristic
This pattern is used in general applications.
Used when the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, for linear transport systems.
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
Variable torque characteristic
This pattern is used for loads with torque proportional to two or three times the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
3
4
5
6
7
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
50 Hz specifications,
×
3 decrement
50 Hz specifications,
×
2 decrement
60 Hz specifications,
×
3 decrement
60 Hz specifications,
×
2 decrement
50 Hz specifications, medium startup torque
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)
*
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup (elevator loads, etc.)
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less than optimum.
8
9
A
B
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
60 Hz specifications, medium startup torque
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
Fixed Output
Operation
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
•
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
•
2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
•
55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6
-
73
6
-74
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
•
Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
1.3 2.5
1.5
•
Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz
1.5 3
Set Value 6
1.5 3
60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz
1.3
1.3
•
High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz
1.5
Set Value A
1.5
60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
1.3 2.5
1.3 2.5
•
Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Individual Functions
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
•
Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
•
Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz
•
High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
•
Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz
6
-
75
6
-76
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
•
Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
•
Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz
•
High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
•
Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz
Individual Functions
INFO
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to anything other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.46 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
•
When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control method.
•
Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥
E1-06 (FA)
>
E1-07 (FB)
≥
E1-09 (FMIN)
6
-
77
6
-78
Digital Operator Functions
Setting Digital Operator Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description o1-02
Monitor selection after power up
Set the monitor item to be displayed when the power supply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
1:
2 to 39:
0.01% (Maximum output frequency is
100%) rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor o2-01 o2-02
Set digit number excluding the decimal point.
Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set 12000.
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP Key during control circuit terminal operation
Set the run method selection key (LOCAL/REMOTE Key) function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and the constant settings.)
Set the STOP Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.) o2-03 User constant initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
o2-05
Frequency reference setting method selection
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter
Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation.
o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
o2-10 Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using hour units.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
1 to 4
0 to
39999
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 or 1
0 to
65535
0 to
65535
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Digital Operator Functions
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units for the following constants using o1-03.
•
U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
•
U1-02 (Output Frequency)
•
U1-05 (Motor Speed)
•
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
•
d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02 selects the monitor item (U1-
[status monitor]) that is to be displayed on the Digital
Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1-
in
Chapter 5 User Constants
.
Setting Precautions
INFO
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01 (monitor selection), and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. If the key is disabled, you cannot use it to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN-command source.
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
6
-
79
6
-80
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP key to increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s thereafter. Press and hold down the UP key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after that.
The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN keys are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
•
Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
•
Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
•
Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description o3-01 Copy function selection o3-02 Read permitted selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3 0 No A
0 or 1 0 No A
Digital Operator Functions
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Table 6.2 READ Function Procedure
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the constants monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.
4
5
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the constants setting display.
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER key. The READ function will start.
7
If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write operation will be stopped.
6
-
81
6
-82
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Table 6.3 COPY Function Procedure
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the constants monitor display.
3
4
5
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the constants setting display.
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER key. The COPY function will start.
7
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area are different.
Digital Operator Functions
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Table 6.4 VERIFY Function Procedure
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the MENU key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
4
5
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the constants monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.
Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the function setting display.
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER key. The VERIFY function will start.
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
INFO
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Control method
6
-
83
6
-84
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
Constant
Number
Name
A1-01 Constant access level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming (A) mode.)
0 or 2 2 Yes A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
A1-01 Constant access level
A1-04
A1-05
Password
Password setting
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Access
Level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming (A) mode.)
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 constants can no longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the password
(A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.
0 or 2
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
2
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
INFO
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor problems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-12
7
-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
•
Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
•
Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator.
•
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Display Meaning
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter output.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
The output transistor has failed because of a short-circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit between the following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the output transistor:
U, V, W
,
← →
U, V, W
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V
400 V class: Approx. 820 V
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Increase the deceleration time or connect a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit.
Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
(
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW
• An open-phase occurred with the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage dropped.
---
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
Overheating occurred in the inrush resistor.
The MC did not respond for 10 s even though the MC ON signal has been output.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW
• The MC in the main circuit failed.
• The MC excitation coil is burned out.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually (not when regenerating).
• An open-phase occurred in the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases is bad.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
)
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
• There is a broken wire in the output cable.
• There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.
• The output terminals are loose.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 or 105
°
C.
OH: The temperature exceeded the setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can be changed by L8-03.).
OH1: The temperature exceeded
100
°
C (Stopping method: Coast to stop).
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped. Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
7
-
3
7
-4
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue to operate according to the setting of
L1-03.
The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2.
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the setting of L1-04.
The motor has overheated.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2.
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and cycle time are too short.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high or too low.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is incorrect.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high or too low.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity.
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in N3-04.
The inertia returned to the load is too large.
• Make sure the load is an inertial load.
• Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce 0 V is 120 s or less.
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop during open-loop vector control.
Check the motor constants.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
PI Feedback Reference Lost
A PI feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PI feedback input was less than b5-13 (PI feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI feedback loss detection time).
Probable Causes
-
External fault input from Communications Option Card
-
Corrective Actions
-
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications signals.
External fault (Input terminal 3)
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
An "external fault" was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
External fault (Input terminal 6)
External fault (Input terminal 7)
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during operation for a
RUN command from the Digital
Operator.
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data was received once.
-
-
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected during a run command or while setting a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card.
-
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't connected properly.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
-
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
CPU External RAM Fault
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected properly.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
Baseblock circuit error
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
7
-
5
7
-6
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
EEPROM error
-
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU internal A/D converter error
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU internal A/D converter error
-
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Option Card connection error
ASIC internal RAM fault
The control circuit is damaged.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
Replace the Inverter.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Watchdog timer fault
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
The control circuit is damaged.
-
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
ASIC version fault
The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
Communications Option Card A/D converter error
The Option Card is not connected properly.
The Option Card's A/D converter is faulty.
Communications Option Card self diagnostic error
Communications Option Card model code error
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the Option Card.
Communications Option Card
DPRAM error
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Display
(blinking)
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than
0.5 s.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Probable causes
-
Corrective Actions
Check the sequence of the forward and reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault occurs.
(blinking)
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The surge current limiting contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
(blinking)
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications.
(blinking)
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Remove the heat source
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
Yaskawa representative.)
(blinking)
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
-
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
(blinking)
Motor overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level.
The motor has overheated.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
(blinking)
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
-
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
7
-
7
7
-8
Display Meaning
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Probable causes
External error detected for Communications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external fault was input from the Option Card.
-
Corrective Actions
Remove the cause of the external fault.
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S3)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S4)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S5)
An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S6)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S7)
(blinking)
PI Feedback Reference Lost
A PI feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PI feedback input was less than b5-13 (PI feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI feedback loss detection time).
(blinking)
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
2 s or longer after received control data.
(blinking)
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a mode where the run command or a frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
(blinking)
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON.
-
-
-
-
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check the communications devices and signals.
-
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors.
Display
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Meaning Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Constant setting range error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Multi-function input selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
06) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.
• The Multi-function Analog Input Terminal (A2) Function Selection (H3-09) was set to a value other than 1F and the Terminal 13/14 Switch (1F) was selected, but the Terminal A1/A2 Switching (H3-13) was set to use the main speed frequency for A2 (H3-13 = 1).
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
Option Card selection error
Multi-function analog input selection error
V/f data setting error
Constant setting error
EEPROM write error
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
Constant selection error
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Example:
A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
PI control selection error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PI Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PI Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX)
≥
E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB)
≥
E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX)
≥
E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB)
≥
E3-07 (FMIN)
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Rrequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
7
-
9
7
-10
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Display
Motor data error
Alarm
Meaning
STOP key input
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Probable causes Corrective Actions
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
• Check the input data.
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor.
A minor fault occurred during autotuning (xxx).
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
Line-to-line resistance error
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user constant.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
Acceleration error
(detected only for rotational autotuning)
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
Current detection error
The current flow exceeded the motor rated current.
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
Check the current detection circuit, motor wiring, current detector, and installation methods.
V/f settings excessive
*
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
The torque reference exceeded 100% and the no-load torque exceeded 70% during autotuning.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
Rated current setting alarm
*
The rated current is set high.
Check the input data (particularly the motor output current and motor rated current).
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Function
Read
Copy
Display Meaning
Digital Operator write-protected
Illegal read data
ID not matched
Inverter capacity matched
Control method matched
Verify error
Checksum error
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Illegal write status
Probable causes Corrective Actions o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
The read data length does not agree.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
The write data is incorrect.
Replace the Digital Operator.
An attempted write of a constant to
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
The Inverter product code or software number is different.
Use the copy function for the same product code and software number.
The capacity of the Inverter being copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
The control method of the Inverter being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same control method.
The constant written to the Inverter was compared with the constant in the
Digital Operator and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The checksum in the Inverter constant area was compared with the checksum in the Digital Operator constant area and they were different.
Retry the copy.
7
-
11
7
-12
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when "constant write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to
Operation Errors
in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
Troubleshooting
If the Motor Does Not Operate
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to make the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER key. The DRIVE indicator will light when drive mode is entered.
IMPORTANT
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate when the Run key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key make the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER key. The DRIVE indicator will light when drive mode is entered.
7
-
13
7
-14
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to
S7) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.
Troubleshooting
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.
When 1F (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor unit and braking unit is connected.
The following causes are possible.
"Stall prevention during deceleration enabled" is set.
When Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0 (disabled). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking resistor unit and the braking unit do not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02 and C1-04 ) .
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider increasing the motor capacity.
7
-
15
7
-16
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and M2) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to
5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz) . Change the setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
If the Motor Overheats
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special motor for Inverters.
If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the starting or running inverter
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
•
Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
•
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
•
Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
•
Ground the Inverter and motor.
•
Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
Troubleshooting
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant) and N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I constants. (Refer to page 6-65.)
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
•
Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
•
Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
7
-
17
7
-18
If OV is Detected When a Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of OV (Over Voltage) and stalling can occur if a fan is turning when it is started. The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04)
×
Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................8-2
8
-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
•
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
•
The ambient temperature should not be too high.
•
The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
•
The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Item
Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspection
External terminals, mounting bolts, connectors, etc.
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins
PCBs
Cooling fan
Power elements
Smoothing capacitor
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours?
Replace the cooling fan.
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Cooling fan
Breaker relays
Fuses
Part
Smoothing capacitor
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
Fig 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
5 years
-
Replace with new part. (Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
10 years
5 years
Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30
°
C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8
-
3
8
-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
1
Air flow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controler.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.
Controller bracket
Controller
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8
-
5
8
-6
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal card.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card
Fig 8.5 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications.................................. 9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-5
9
-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-E7C
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
0.4
1.2
3.2
0.75
1.6
4.1
1.5
2.7
7.0
2.2
3.7
9.6
3.7
5.7
15
5.5
8.8
23
7.5
12
31
11
17
45
15
22
58
18.5
27
71
32
85
44 55 69 82 110 130 160
115 145 180 215 283 346 415
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
120 Hz max.
+ 10%, - 15%
22 30
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
37 45 55 75 90 110
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-phase rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built in
Possible
*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Model Number CIMR-E7C
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
40P4
0.4
1.4
1.8
Allowable frequency fluctuation
40P7
0.75
1.6
2.1
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
41P5
1.5
42P2
2.2
43P7
3.7
44P0
4.0
45P5
5.5
47P5
7.5
4011
11
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
9.5
13 18
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17 24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
120 Hz max.
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
4015
15
24
31
4018
18.5
30
39
DC reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-phase rectification
Optional
Not possile
Model Number CIMR-E7C
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
4022
22
34
45
4030
30
46
60
4037
37
4045
45
4055
55
4075
75
4090
90
4110
110
4132
132
4160
160
4185
185
57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230 280
75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
370
120 Hz max.
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
4220
220
390
506
4300
300
510
675
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible
*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9
-
3
9
-4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-E7C
Control method
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Specification
Sine wave PWM
V/f control
1:40
±2 to 3% (25
°
C ± 10
°
C)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10
°
C to +40
°
C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25
°
C ±10
°
C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (10 bit with sign)
Frequency setting resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current
*2
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
120% of rated output current per minute
0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA
0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Main control functions
Motor protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethru
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, 4-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning, cooling fan ON/OFF control, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PI control
(with sleep function), energy-saving control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and function copying.
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Stops for fuse blown.
120% of rated output current for 1 minute
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Stops for 15 ms or more.
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (50% of inverter rated current)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
-10
°
C to 40
°
C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
–10
°
C to 45
°
C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20
°
C to + 60
°
C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s
2
max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s
2
max
* 1. Not including the 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW and the 400 V Class Inverters for 220 and 300 kW.
* 2. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Protect Inverter wiring
Prevents burning when a Braking Resistor is used.
Magnetic Contactor
Contains switching surge
Isolates I/O signals
Improve the input power factor of the
Inverter
Name
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter
*
NF
Surge Absorber
Isolator
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
Model (Code)
HI-
J
DCR2-
DGP
UZDA-
UZBA-
Input Noise Filter (See EMC Part.)
Descriptions
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies.
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the coil.
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible.
Power supply
MCCB or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor
AC reactor to improve power factor
Zero phase reactor
Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise
Finemet zerophase reactor to reduce radio noise
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
Output Noise Filter
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
LF-
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Input-line noise filter
Enable stopping the machine in a set time
Operates the Inverter externally
Braking Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
LKEB-
CDBR-
(75600-K
(72600-R
JVOP-95•
JVOP-96•
(73041-0905X-
(73041-0906X-
0)
0)
)
)
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close to the Inverter as possible.
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
(Braking Unit is needed.)
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Inverter
VS Operator
Frequency
Ground
Output-line noise filter
DC reactor
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
1 m cable: (72616-
W5001)
3 m cable: (72616-
W5003)
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Controls an Inverter system
VS System Module
JGSM-
Provides Inverter momentary power loss recovery time
Set/monitor frequencies and voltages externally.
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P00
0
(73600-P00
0)
Frequency Meter DCF-6A
Frequency Setter RV30YN20S (2 k
Ω
)
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter SCF-12NH
A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
Ground
Motor
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM Inverter.
Correct frequency reference input, frequency meter, ammeter scales
Variable Resistor
Board for Frequency Reference
Frequency Meter
Scale Correction
Resistor
2 k
Ω
20 k
(ETX003270)
Ω
(ETX003120)
(RH000850)
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference.
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
* Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
9
-
5
9
-6
Available Option Cards
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Type Name
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-N
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Card
SI-P
Built-in
(connected to connector)
Communications
Option
Cards
InterBus-S
Communications Interface Card
SI-R
CANopen
Communications Interface Card
SI-S
ControlNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-U
CC-Link
Communications Interface Card
SI-C
* Under development.
Code Number
73600-
C021X
73600-
C022X
*
*
*
73600-
C032X
Function
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using ControlNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Document
Number
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-2
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
User Constants ..........................................................10-7
10
10
-2
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.1
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
Options
Terminals , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa. Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
Inverter Application Precautions
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 120 Hz. Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 50 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD
2
/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10
10
-
3
10
-4
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator does not lit anymore before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (50 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (50 Hz or more).
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (50 Hz).
10
10
-
5
10
-6
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz.
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW set to factory set control method (open loop vector control).
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
Name
A1-00 Language selection for digital L C D operator display
A1-01 Constant access level
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password setting b1-01 Reference selection b1-02 Operation method selection b1-03 Stopping method selection b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation b1-07 Operation selection after switching to remote mode b1-08 Run command selection in programming modes b2-01 Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency) b2-02 DC injection braking current b2-03 DC injection braking time at start b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop b3-01 Speed search selection b3-02 Speed search operating current b3-03 Speed search deceleration time b3-05 Speed search wait time b5-01 PI control mode selection b5-02 Proportional gain (P) b5-03 Integral (I) time b5-04 Integral (I) limit b5-06 PI limit b5-07 PI offset adjustment b5-08 PI primary delay time constant b5-12 Selection of PI feedback command loss detection b5-13 PI feedback command loss detection level b5-14 PI feedback command loss detection time b5-15 PI sleep function operation level b5-16 PI sleep operation delay time b5-17 Acceleration/deceleration time for PI reference b8-01 Energy saving mode selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient b8-05 Power detection filter time constant b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C1-03 Acceleration time 2
C1-04 Deceleration time 2
C1-09 Fast Stop Time
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
C4-01 Torque compensation gain
C4-02 Torque compensation time constant
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
C6-05 Carrier Freq. Proportional Gain d1-01 Frequency reference 1 d1-02 Frequency reference 2 d1-03 Frequency reference 3 d1-04 Frequency reference 4 d1-17 Jog frequency reference d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit
20
0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
1.0
0.0
0.20
0.20
1.00
200
6
*3
15.0
*3
15.0
*3
00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6.00
100.0
0.2
0
1.00
1.0
100.0
100.0
0.0
0.00
0
0.5
50
0.00
0.50
2
100
2.0
Factory
Setting
1
*1
2
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
Setting
10
10
-
7
10
-8
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3 d3-04 Jump frequency width d6-01 Field weakening level d6-02 Field frequency
E1-01 Input voltage setting
E1-03 V/f pattern selection
E1-04 Max. output frequency
E1-05 Max. voltage
E1-06 Base frequency
E1-07 Mid. output frequency
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage
E1-09 Min. output frequency
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2
E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2
E1-13 Base voltage
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-05 Terminal Resistance
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error
F6-02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
F6-03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card
F6-05 I monitor unit selection
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection (contact)
H3-02 Gain (terminal A1)
H3-03 Bias (terminal A1)
H3-08 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
H3-09 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2)
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2)
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM)
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM)
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM)
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM)
H4-07 Analog output 1 signal level selection
H4-08 Analog output 2 signal level selection
H5-01 Station address
H5-02 Communication speed selection
H5-03 Communication parity selection
H5-04 Stopping method after communication error
H5-05 Communication error detection selection
H5-06 Send wait time
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF
L1-01 Motor protection selection
L1-02 Motor protection time constant
L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
Factory
Setting
1.90
*3
9.842
1
0
1
0
24
14
3 (0)
*5
4 (3)
*5
6 (4)
*5
0
1
0
100.0
0
2
100.0
0.0
5
1
3
1
0
1F
3
0
0
2
100%
0.0
3
50%
0.0
0
1
1.0
3
F
50.0
200.0
7
50.0
3.0
15.0
*4
1.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
80
0.0
200
*4
9.0
*4
0.0
*6
0.0
*6
0.0
*7
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection
L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time constant
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection
L2-02 Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during accel
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel
L3-04 Stall prevention selection during decel
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing
L4-06
F
Ref
@ F
Ref
Loss
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1
L6-02 Torque detection level 1
L6-03 Torque detection time 1
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
L8-09 Ground protection selection
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time
L8-12 Ambient temperature
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
L8-18 Soft CLA selection
N1-01 Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain
N3-01 High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
N3-02 High-slip braking current limit
N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time
N3-04 High-slip braking OL time o1-01 Monitor selection o1-02 Monitor selection after powerup o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor o1-05 LCD Focus o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation o2-03 User constant initial value o2-04 kVA selection o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection o2-09 Initialize mode o2-10 Fan operation time setting o2-12 Fault trace initialisation o3-01 Copy function selection o3-02 Read permitted selection
* 1. Not initialized. (European standard specifications: A1-00 = 0)
* 2. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
* 3. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 4. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 5. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
* 6. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
* 7. E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
Factory
Setting
1
0.20
0
0.1
*3
0.1
0.3
190
*4
1
120
1
1
120
0.0
2.0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
3
1
0
*3
40
6
1
0
1.00
5
150
1.0
0
0
0
45
1
1
1
95
3
1
60
80%
0
0
0
150
0.1
Setting
10
10
-
9
10
-10
Sales and Service in Europe and Worldwide
European Headquarter:
Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 300, Fax.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 398
European Subsidiaries
UK, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Unit 2, Centurion Court
Brick Close, Kiln Farm, Milton Keynes Bucks MK11 3JA, UK
Tel.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 874, Fax.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 891
Italy, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Via Emilia Ovest 95/F
41013 Castelfranco E. (MO), Italy
Tel.: +39 059 - 92 21 21, Fax.: +39 059 - 92 21 68
France, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Z.A des Béthunes, 2, rue du Rapporteur
95310 St Quen L’Aum
ô ne, France
Tel:+33 (0)1 39 09 09 00, Fax:+33 (0)1 30 37 29 02
Spain, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Errekalde etorbidea, 59.
20009 Donostia - San Sebastian, Spain
Tel:+34 943 360 832, Fax:+34 943 360 193
Headquarters Worldwide
Tokyo Office
Yaskawa Electric Corporation, New Pier Takeshiba South Tower
1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo 105-0022, Japan
Tel.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4511, Fax.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4580
American Headquarter
Yaskawa Electric America Inc., 2121 Norman Drive South
Waukegan, Il 60085, U.S.A.
Tel.: +1 (847)- 887-7000, Fax.: +1 (847)- 887-7370
Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, March 2001 YEG-TOE-S616-56.1
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Control of motor speed and torque
Available in 200V and 400V voltage classes
Motor capacities from 0.4 to 300kW
Suitable for fans, blowers, and pumps
Digital operator for easy setup and monitoring
Multiple protection features to prevent motor damage
Autotuning function for easy motor setup
Multiple modes of operation for various applications
Multiple programming modes for different levels of expertise
Option cards for expanded functionality
Frequently asked questions
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C is a general-purpose inverter that is used for controlling the speed and torque of electric motors.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C is suitable for applications including fans, blowers, and pumps.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C is available in 200V and 400V voltage classes.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has maximum motor capacities from 0.4 to 300kW.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has a digital operator that allows you to easily set up and monitor the device.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has multiple protection features to prevent motor damage, such as overload protection, overcurrent protection, and overvoltage protection.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has an autotuning function that makes it easy to set up the motor.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has multiple modes of operation, including forward, reverse, jog, and brake.
The Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has multiple programming modes, including quick programming mode, advanced programming mode, and verify mode.
Yes, the Varispeed E7 CIMR-E7C has option cards that can be used to expand the functionality of the device.